a* 
 
LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 Received 
 Accession No. 
 
 Class No. 
 
 ' 
 
THE STAGE IN THE ATTIC THEATRE 
 
 OF THE JTH CENTURY 
 
 B. C. 
 
 A Thesis presented at the University of Minnesota 
 
 as a part of the work done for the degree 
 
 of Doctor of Philosophy 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN A. SANFORD, B. A. 
 
 ipress of jfllMnnesota 
 
 MINNEAPOLIS 
 1895 
 

 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 THE PRINCIPAL THOUGHT in this thesis is contained in the third 
 chapter, and it is this : that in the Greek theatre of the fifth 
 century B. C. both actors and chorus stood in the orchestra. 
 In establishing the truth of this thought the chorus is at all 
 times a prominent element. It is, in fact, in great measure, the 
 conduct of the chorus, and the relation that it sustains to the 
 actors, that determine whether the actors as well as the chorus 
 stood in the orchestra. It has seemed fitting, therefore, to 
 devote the first chapter to tracing the development of the chorus 
 from prehistoric times up to the time when it became an impor- 
 tant element in the drama, and to devote the second chapter to 
 describing the external characteristics of the chorus. 
 
 Many statements are made in the first chapter without 
 reference to the authoriti^O^ence they are derived. It may 
 suffice to state here that the works that have been consulted 
 and read in writing this chapter are the following : 
 
 Homer: Iliad, Odyssey, Hymn to Apollo. 
 
 Hesiod : Works and Days, Shield of Hercules. 
 
 Herodotus : Historiae. 
 
 Aristotle : Problems, Ars Poetica. 
 
 Catullus: Carmina. 
 
 Muller : History Literature of Greece. 
 
 Mure: History Literature of Greece. 
 
 Mahaffy : History Literature of Greece. 
 
 Grote : History of Greece. 
 
 Smith : History of Greece. 
 
 Jebb : Classical Greek Poetry. 
 
 Moulton : The Ancient Classical Drama. 
 
 Walford : Hand-book of the Greek Drama. 
 
 Haigh : The Attic Theatre. 
 
 In writing the second and third chapters there have been 
 consulted and read, besides some of the works named above, 
 the following works : 
 
 ^Eschylus: Supplices, Persae, Seven Against Thebes, Prometheus Vinctus, 
 Agamemnon, Chcephori, Eumenides. 
 
 Sophocles: Ajax, Antigone, Electra, CEdipus Tyrannus, CEdipusColoneus, 
 Philoctetes, Trachinias. 
 
 (3) 
 
 UFIVBRSITY 
 
4 INTRODUCTION 
 
 Euripides : Alcestis, Medea, Hippolytus, Andromache, Heracleidas, Sup- 
 plices, Hecuba. Hercules Furens, Ion, Troades, Helena, Iphigema in Tauris, 
 Electra, Orestes. Phoenissae, Iphigenia in Aulis, Bacchae, Rhesus, Cyclops. 
 
 Aristophanes : Acharnians, Knights, Clouds, Wasps, Peace, Birds, Lysis- 
 trata, Thesmophoriazusae, Frogs, Ecclesiazusae, Plutus. 
 
 Xenophon : Institutio Cyri, Hiero. 
 
 Pindar: Carmina. 
 
 Pausanias : Descriptio Graeciae. 
 
 Pollux: Onomasticon. 
 
 Plato: Symposium, Gorgias. 
 
 Aristotle: Politics, Metaphysics, 
 
 Plutarch : Vitae. 
 
 Lysias : Orations. 
 
 ^schines: Orations. 
 
 Antiphon : Orations. 
 
 Demosthenes: Meidias, Philippic I. 
 
 Diodorus Siculus: Bibliothecae Hitoricae. 
 
 Dubner: Scholia in Aristophanen. 
 
 Horace: Ars Poetica. 
 
 Muff: Chorische Technik des Sophocles. 
 
 Richter: Die altgriechische Tragodie und das altgriechische Theaterwesen. 
 
 Schultze: De Chori Graecorum Tragici Habitu Kxterno. 
 
 Alberti: De ^Eschyli Choro Supplicum. 
 
 Capps: 'The Greek Stage', Transactions American Philological Associa- 
 tion, 1892. 
 
 Pickard : 'The Relative Positions of Actors and Chorus', American Jour- 
 nal Philology, April, July, October, 1893. 
 
 White: "The 'Stage' in Aristophanes", Harvard Studies in Classical Phil- 
 ology, 1891. 
 
 Haigh: 'Dr. Dorpfeld's Theor\ r About the Logeion in Greek Theatres', 
 Classical Review, May 1890. 
 
 Miss Harrison: 'Dr. Dorpfeld on the Greek Theatre', Classical Review, 
 May, 1890. 
 
 Verrall: 'Haigh's Attic Theatre', Classical Review, May, 1890. 
 
 Muller: Eumenides. 
 
 Harrison and Verrall : Mythology and Monuments of Ancient Greece. 
 
 Shakespeare : Antony and Cleopatra, Macbeth, Titus Andronicus, Hamlet. 
 
 There had been consulted, also, in the course of the work 
 done before writing this thesis, the following works : 
 
 Bergk : Anthologia Lyrica. 
 Mahaffy : Social Life in Greece. 
 Gladstone: Time and Place of Homer. 
 Symonds : Greek Poets. 
 Tyler: Theology of the Greek Poets. 
 
INTRODUCTION 5 
 
 Schmidt: Rhythmic <md Metric. 
 
 Miss Swanwick : Poets the Interpreters of their Age. 
 
 Heren : Researches in Ancient Greece. 
 
 Bceck : Public Economy of Athens. 
 
 Geddes: The Problem of the Homeric Poems. 
 
 Guhl and Koner: The Life of the Greeks and Romans. 
 
 Murray: Manual of Mythology. 
 
 Curtius : History of Greece. 
 
 Whitney : Oriental and Linguistic Studies. 
 
 Muller: Chips from a German Workshop. 
 
 There is given on page 7 an outline table of contents of the 
 three chapters. Immediately before each chapter is given a de- 
 tailed table of contents of that chapter, and at the close of the 
 thesis is given a combined table of contents of the three chap- 
 ters. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I : GENESIS AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 
 
 1. The Divisions of Greek Poetry ... 13 
 
 g2. Singing by Individuals in Homer . . 14 
 
 3. Early Meanings of the Word Choros . . 15 
 
 4. Choral Exercises in Homer and in Hesiod . . 15 
 
 5. The Divisions of Lyric Poetry ... 22 
 
 6. The Cultivation of Greek Music .... 23 
 
 7. Choral Exercises of the JEolic School of Poets . 24 
 
 8. Choral Exercises of the Doric School of Poets . 25 
 
 * 9. The Worship of Dionysus .... 29 
 
 10. The Dithyramb of Arion . ... . .32 
 
 11. The Development of Tragedy from the Dithyramb 33 
 
 12. The Further Development of Tragedy ... 34 
 13. The Subsequent Cultivation of the Dithyramb, and 
 
 of Lyric Poetry ...... 37 
 
 CHAPTER II : THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 
 
 1. The Number of the Choreutje .... 40 
 
 2. The Position of the Choreutae .... 45 
 
 3. The Names of the Choreutae .... 52 
 
 4. A Secondary Chorus . . . . .54 
 
 5. The Choregus ...... 55 
 
 6. The Delivery of the Choral Parts ... 60 
 
 7. The Costume of the Choreutae ... 65 
 
 CHAPTER III: THE STAGE 
 
 1. Alleged Evidence in Favor of a Stage . . 70 
 
 2. The Thymele ....... 81 
 
 3. The Steps ; the Distegia .... 88 
 
 4. Archaeological Investigations .... 90 
 
 5. Evidence Against a Stage from the Extant Plays 94 
 6 Evidence Against a Stage from Certain Facts Con- 
 nected with the Entrance of Actors and of Cho- 
 ruses ....... 132 
 
 7. Summary of Chapter III .... 145 
 
 8. The Mistakes of Vitruvius . . 148 
 
CHAPTER I 
 THE GENESIS AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 
 
 CONTENTS 
 1 . The Divisions of Greek Poetry : 
 
 2. Singing by Individuals in Homer: 
 The Song of Calypso. 
 The Song of Circe. 
 The Song of Achilles. 
 Character of these songs. 
 
 3. Early Meanings of the Word %o(n'/>?; 
 
 yyOJ signifying place. 
 
 %of)dy where the idea of dancing is prominent. 
 
 Adornment at the dance. 
 
 %uf)Of transferred to the dancer. 
 
 4. Choral Exercises in Homer and in Hesiod : 
 THE P^EAN: Sung when in Homer. 
 The Paean in Iliad I. 
 The Paean in Iliad XXII. 
 No dancing in the Homeric Paean. 
 The Paean in later times. 
 Metrical form of the Homeric Paean. 
 THE THRENOS: Denned. 
 
 Early cultivation of the Threnos. 
 The Linus-song: 
 
 The three characters of Linus. 
 An extant Linus-song. 
 
 Connected with the death of the seasons. 
 Hesiod says concerning the Linus-song. 
 The Linus-song in Homer. 
 Characteristics of. 
 The Threnos in the Iliad. 
 Characteristics of. 
 The Threnos in the Odyssey. 
 Metrical form of the Threnos. 
 Later history of the Threnos. 
 THE HYMEN^EUS: The Hj-menaeus in the Iliad. 
 The Hymenaeus in Hesiod. 
 The Hymenaeus in later writers. 
 
 THE HYPORCHEME : The Hyporcheme in the Iliad. 
 The Hyporcheme in the Hymn Apol. 
 The Hyporcheme in the Odyssey. 
 The Hyporcheme defined. 
 Popularity of the Hyporcheme. 
 Its antiquity. 
 Its chief characteristics. 
 PARTHENIA IN HOMER. 
 
 The instance in the Iliad. 
 RESPONSIVE SINGING IN THE ILIAD. 
 
 SUMMARY OF CHORAL FORMS IN HOMER AND IN HESIOD. 
 (9) 
 
10 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 5. The Divisions of Lyric Poetry : 
 
 Lyric poetry includes only melic. 
 The elegiac and the iambic called e~r/ . 
 Melic poetry divided into two schools. 
 The distinctions between them. 
 
 6. The Cultivation of Greek Music : 
 
 The tetrachord. 
 Terpander. 
 Olympus. 
 Thaletas. 
 
 7. Choral Exercises of the ^Eolic School of Poets : 
 
 SAPPHO : Songs for a single voice. 
 
 Songs lor choruses. 
 ANACREON : His character. 
 
 His songs for choruses. 
 ALC^EUS: No choral poetry. 
 
 8. Choral Exercises of the Doric School of Poets : 
 
 Further development of the chorus. 
 THE STROPHE : In choral poetry. 
 
 Its origin. 
 
 In elegiac poetry. 
 
 The melic ; the Doric. 
 
 Melic strophe described. 
 
 The Doric strophe described. 
 
 The epode. 
 
 Origin of anti-strophic recital. 
 ALCMAN: His contemporaries. 
 
 His predecessors. 
 
 His excellence. 
 
 He celebrated secular occasions. 
 
 His parthenia. 
 
 Features of his chorus. 
 
 His other compositions for choruses. 
 
 His metres. 
 
 Remaining choral poets not at Sparta. 
 STESICHORUS: His originality. 
 
 Size of his chorus. 
 
 The epode. 
 
 His epico-lyric hymns. 
 IBYCUS : He belongs to two schools. 
 
 His love songs. 
 
 These produced on what occasions. 
 Remaining masters of choral poetry: 
 
 Add no new elements. 
 
 The hymn of Stesichorus. 
 Lyric poets compose for pay. 
 
 Bacchylides. 
 
 Pindar. 
 
 Timocreon. 
 
 9. The Worship of Dionysus : 
 
 A new kind of poetry needed. 
 Why the dithyramb was popular. 
 
THE GENESIS AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 11 
 
 9. The Worship of Dionysus (Concluded): 
 
 Why the dithyramb was capable of dramatic development: 
 
 (1 ) Opportunities for forming plots. 
 
 (2) Opportunities for assuming characters. 
 
 10. The Dithyramb of Arion : 
 
 Cultivated at Corinth. 
 
 Arion's chorus. 
 
 The iEdftyuw. 
 
 The musical accompaniment. 
 
 The size of the chorus. 
 
 11. The Development of Tragedy from the Dithyramb : 
 The extension of the part of the zaft%wv. 
 The extension of subjects. 
 The dithyramb at Athens becomes tragedy. 
 The final step the addition of the actor. 
 
 12. The Further Development of Tragedy : 
 The chorus of Thespis. 
 The chorus of Phrynichus. 
 The chorus of Choerilus. 
 Pratinas and the satyr-drama. 
 Characteristics of the satyr-drama. 
 AESCHYLUS: Shortened the choral odes. 
 
 Added a second actor. 
 SOPHOCLES: Added a third actor. 
 
 Shortened the choral odes. 
 EURIPIDES : Shortened the choral odes. 
 Decline of the chorus as a living element. 
 The ideal chorus. 
 
 13. The Subsequent Cultivation of the Ditlryramb, and of Lyric Poetry : 
 The dithyramb continued in Doric states. 
 The 'Attic' dithyramb. 
 The decline of lyric poetry. 
 
orn i 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 THE GENESIS AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 
 
 1 THE DIVISIONS OF GREEK POETRY 
 
 It is customary to divide the poetry of the Greeks into three 
 classes, the Epic, the Lyric, the Dramatic. Under the second of 
 these classes is included all the poetry oi the lyre whether a 
 mournful elegy of Mimnermus or an enthusiastic dithyramb of 
 Arion, all poetry, in fact, that is neither epic nor dramatic. It 
 is necessary, however, to emphasize the fact that the lyric 
 poetry did not suddenly arise at the time when the epic had 
 lived its day, when no longer poets were found of originality 
 sufficient to compose epic poems that satisfied the people, and 
 when weak imitations of the old masters were the only epic 
 poems produced. At this time the people began to cultivate 
 lyric poetry, but this kind of poetry existed, and in a state of 
 considerable development, at the time when the Iliad and 
 the Odyssey were composed. The drama, the chief elements of 
 which are dialogue and choral songs, was the culmination of 
 Greek poetry. It will be admitted that in the epic poetry there 
 is an abundance of dialogue, and it will be shown that the 
 choral element exists there, and in many of the forms that it 
 had in ages subsequent to that of Homer. Furthermore, the 
 dramatic element is prominent in the Iliad. In the first book, 
 the quarrel scene between Agamemnon and Achilles is as dram- 
 atic as is any scene in the plays of the tragedians of the fifth 
 century. The dramatic instinct of the Greeks, then, appears in 
 their epic poetry ; dialogue is found there, and instances will be 
 pointed out where the choral element is prominent in the epic 
 poetry. It is evident, then, that the drama was a combination 
 of different kinds of poetry that had existed since prehistoric 
 davs. 
 
14 THE ATTIC STAGE OF Till: FIFTH CEXTi'KY 
 
 2 SINGING BY INDIVIDUALS IN HOMER 
 
 111 the Odyssey, when Hermes arrives at the island of 
 
 Calypso, on the mission of liberating Ulysses, he 
 
 The song of fi d " Q a ] ypso singing with 'beautiful voice.' 1 
 
 Calypso J L >t- 
 
 The queen is thus beguiling the hours, as she 
 labors at the loom . 
 
 In a similar manner, when Ulysses approaches the cave of 
 The song of Circe, he finds her within singing beautifully, as 
 
 circe sne plies the loom. 2 
 
 In the Iliad, the Embassadors to the tent of Achilles find 
 
 that prince seated on the ground singing the 
 
 The song of Morions deeds of men' to the accompaniment 
 
 Achilles fe 
 
 of a clear-toned harp. 3 
 
 What was the character of the singing on these three oc- 
 casions we have -no information ; yet it is safe 
 character of to infer that in the first two instances it did 
 
 these songs no t materially differ from that of many of 
 
 the songs of Sappho or Alcaeus. The songs of 
 Calypso and of Circe are not to be considered the direct fore- 
 runners of the Lesbian school of poetry, but may serve as illus- 
 trations of the fact that this school did not create a new kind 
 of poetry, but merely developed a kind of poetry that already 
 existed . The singing of Achilles was doubtless of a more serious 
 kind. It can hardly be supposed that a fierce warrior was sing- 
 ing a song of the Sapphic school. The greater elaborateness of 
 his song is seen in the fact that he sang with a musical accompani- 
 ment. Among the earliest kinds of lyric poetry to be cultivated 
 in the historic age is the iambic of Archilochus. We have a 
 fragment left us of one of his poems addressed to his own soul, 4 
 and it is by no means improbable that the Song of Achilles was 
 an earlier example of this kind of poetry ; not necessarily in 
 the same metre as that of Archilochus, but merely a kind of 
 poetry of the seriousness that was afterwards developed hymen 
 such as Archilochus, or the elder Simonides. 
 
 1 61. TJ (T svdov aotdtdotHf 1 o~} xauifj. 
 
 2 X 221. Ki>7.r (T IVoov &XHOIW detdoUffl? o~\ 7.0.A. 3 / 182-196. 
 
 4> My soul, my soul, careworn, bereft of rest, 
 
 Arise ! and front the foe with dauntless breast ; quoted in Sm. Hist. Gr., p. 129. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 15 
 
 3 EARLY MEANINGS OP THE WORD /<>( ^ 
 
 The word /<>{><>< in historic times signified a band of trained 
 singers and dancers. The primary signification 
 of the word has reference not to persons, but to . o ^ 
 
 place. The use of /"/"^ in the primary sense signifying'piace 
 occurs in the expression />> 'v > " s s 1 'to level 
 the chorus', L e., to make the /('"? ready to dance upon ; and in 
 the expression <>*> //.> IV Y- '/."!>'''' *^~' i^<>^>-^. //>/. >m%z<TOut2 \vhere 
 Hector is said to call the Greeks not to the /< v^. but to battle. 
 The primary signification is seen also in the compound 'V'3- 
 /"/"^ 3 an epithet applied to cities that have spacious squares, 
 i. e., nnmL 
 
 %i>f>6? is, again, used in Homer where the notion of dancing 
 is prominent. Thus, Alcinous says : uts\ oV;,a<v 
 tail r? ^ xWapis r s ^pm re 4 where tp<n hasrefer-' where th ^^ 
 ence to dancing. Similarly, Hesiod says: rm of dancing 
 
 ,Ta>,Jf. S s sv a. Y ka.iw ^ znf,,,is where, again, the is ^ rominent 
 
 meaning of /"/^ is dances. 
 
 That at the dance there was considerable attempt at per- 
 sonal adornment, as well as gracefulness, on the 
 part of the dancer may be inferred from the 
 words of Venus in description of Paris after his 
 combat with Menelaus : 
 
 The transfer of the word %>!><'>$ from the place where the 
 dancing occurred, or from the dancing itself, , /; ^. , 
 
 to the body of individuals that occupied the transferred 
 
 place, and" performed the dancing, was an - 
 easy metaphor. 
 
 4 CHORAL EXERCISES IN HOMER AND IN HESIOD 
 
 Whenever we have singing of many voices in unison or 
 dancing by many to the acompaniment of music, we have a 
 form of the chorus. 
 
 1 260. 2 n 508. 3 cf. // 498. 4 248. 5 Scut. 272. 6 /' 392 flT. 
 
16 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The Paean in Homer may be taken as an instance of an ele- 
 
 mentary choral exercise. The Paean was at all 
 
 Stmg . times in Greek history a song of joy. It was 
 
 when in Homer sung in Homer either in connection with a feast 
 
 of expiation, or, as a joyful song, after a victory 
 
 had been won. 
 
 In the former use, it is sung by the Achaeans at the end of 
 the sacrificial feast, after restoring Chr} r seis to 
 
 The paean h er father I 
 
 in Iliad I. 
 
 (>'. os ir 
 
 In the latter use, it was sung by the Greeks after the death of 
 Hector, Achilles saying to the Greeks : 
 
 The psean ^ ^ v , ,;_ /V}o>7C ~a'.T<>';a. xnnixi'. " A*/a'.(ir;. 
 
 in Iliad XXII 
 
 In neither of these instances, is there any mention of danc- 
 
 ing ; in the latter instance, the paean is sung as 
 NO dancing in the the Greeks march back to the ships. Another 
 Homeric paean example of the singing of the paean by a moving 
 
 body of men occurs where Apollo leads the 
 Cretans to his shrine holding in his hands the lyre. 3 
 
 In later times, the paean was sung by an army when about 
 
 to make an attack ; 4 in Homer, only after the 
 The paean attack had been made. In later times, the paean 
 
 in later times was commonly sung at convivial meetings also, 
 
 the poet Alcman composing pseans for such 
 occasions ; 5 in Homer its use at convivial meetings is limited to 
 feasts of expiation. 
 
 The paean was first adapted to proper melic form hy the 
 
 Cretan Thaletas. Its metrical form in Homer 
 Metrical form can be inferred to have been the hexameter, 
 of the Homeric paean^gcg^^ge that was the only metre at that time 
 
 sufficientl} 7 " developed for an order of poetry so 
 high as an ode to Apollo. 
 
 1 A 473ff. 2 .V 391f. 3 Hymn to Apollo, Pyth. 336ff 
 4 cf. e.g. Xen. Cyr., 4, 1, 6. 5 Frag. XI. Bergk. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 17 
 
 The Threnos expresses a state of feelings directly the reverse 
 of those expressed by the paean. The word 
 'threnos' signifies a lament of any kind, but is Definition 
 
 commonly applied to the lament for the death of the threnos 
 of kindred or friends. Such being its meaning, 
 we may expect to learn that it was cultivated at the earliest 
 stages of civilization. It is here connected with Early cultivation 
 the mythical hero, or demigod, Linus. of the threnos 
 
 This hero appears in three different characters, first as a 
 beautiful boy who, before reaching manhood, The three 
 
 met his death, usually said to have been at the characters 
 
 hands of Apollo ; he next appears as a minstrel 
 who contended with Apollo, and was defeated and killed by 
 him ; in the third character, he appears as the song celebrating 
 theyouthfulministrel,and, in this capacity, he is the type of the 
 order of threnos. The plaintive character of the Linus-song 
 is attested by the full names of .-//:>';> and Uiruhw* which 
 signify respectively, 'Alas Linus,' and 'Death of Linus.' An 
 extant Linus-song is : 
 
 o> . l:'vi art',-; Oz.<>~i<7'.v 
 
 An extant 
 
 os /.('>-<.!> fi ( 
 
 Similar songs were sung in Ancient Greece, and especially 
 in Asia Minor. It is evident from the mournful connected with 
 character of all these songs that they were con- the death 
 
 nected with the death of certain seasons of the 
 year, or with similar natural phenomena. It was an easy task 
 for the Greek imagination to clothe these phenomena with per- 
 sonal forms, to represent them as divine or semi-divine beings. 
 
 Hesiod, in an extant fragment, 2 doubtless wishing to 
 emphasize the ephemeral nature of all things Hesiod says 
 
 earthly, says that the Linus-song should be sung concerning 
 
 at the"beginning, and at the close of all festive 
 meetings. 
 
 1 Fragg. I,yr, p. 1297 Bergk. 2 Cited in Eustathius, p. 1163 ( Fragg. 1, ed. 
 Gaisford.) 
 
18 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The Linns-song represented by Homer upon the Shield of 
 Achilles is as follows : 
 
 The Linus-song ^-^ $ ^ n.i^anin^ ->V <!>o/JLiryz AtYsir. 
 
 in Homer " 
 
 !>.<>/,- r. r ioYff.uJ TC ~o<r\ ffxaif)OVT$ C'TTOVTO.I 
 
 This may be taken to be one of the earliest forms of song, 
 yet it is distinctly choral in its design. The bo} T 
 characteristics sitting ^ !).iffff<>'.w furnishes the music both vocal 
 oftheLimis-song and instrumental. The chorus skip about (-txr\ 
 ff7Miin>'sTss) , and utter shouts ( iujruti ) . In the word 
 /wfafj there is reference probably to dancing, not to singing. 
 >wX-r t commonly refers T.O singing as opposed to dancing, 2 yet it 
 is used also where there is reference only to graceful motion. 3 
 In the Linus-song, /.AW/-JJ probably has this latter meaning, and 
 the chorus are thus represented as dancing gracefully (/W-jj -n<>\ 
 ffzaiiHwrss), and uttering shouts (jw^//w). Whether these shouts 
 had any connection with the singing of the bo}^ there is noth- 
 ing in the context to tell us, but it would seem improbable that 
 such was the case. 
 
 A modification of the Linus-song is found in the threnos, 
 a form of lament found in both the Iliad and the Odyssey. 
 
 At the rites performed over the body of Hector, after the 
 body has been placed in position, the following 
 
 The Threnos exercise takes place I 
 
 in the Iliad 
 
 There is here a step in advance of the primitive Linus-song. 
 
 The lament has reached a state of development 
 
 its characteristics where the dirge is first sung by professional 
 
 singers (Oftr^wv iz<iw>s), and, while they are 
 
 1 -'f(>9n". li 'i.o/,-^ ~" dpfflffTUf, a 152; cf. also: 
 
 fjLofaijs T yJiox6f>tj$ y.a>. ct/xu/jtwvoy dpffiff/j.n'io. A 637. 
 
 3 fJ.'JTf).> c~ ffi~<ltj TOLXffeV dJLWOtt Tc 7.fjCl a')T7. 
 
 w/cvo srjf>/~'> //"/-/}. Z 99ff. 
 4 LI 7 2 Off. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE C7/OAVS 19 
 
 speaking, the assembled mourners join in the action so far as 
 to add their sighs. 
 
 The threnos at the burial of Achilles as described in the 
 Odyssey 1 is a still more elaborate exercise. 
 There the Nereids form the chorus of mourners, The Threnos 
 
 in the Odvssey 
 
 and the threnos is led by the nine Muses. The 
 metrical form of the threnos, as of the paean, was probably the 
 hexameter. An extension of its metrical forms 
 was made ag the lyric art was developed, prob- 
 ably by the Phrygian Olympus. 
 
 During a great part of the time of the ascendlKgfof lyric 
 poetry we hear nothing of the threnos ; yet that 
 this form of poetry was at all times cultivated 
 cannot be doubted ; and we know that the last 
 of the lyric poets, Pindar, devoted some of his time to the 
 threnos, and that the threnoi of his younger contemporary, 
 Simonides, were among that poet's greatest productions. 
 
 The Hymenaeus is described b\ r Homer in his picture of the 
 shield of Achilles. 2 The bride is being conducted 
 to the home of her husband; many a bridal be hl^e^Had 
 
 song is raised as the youthful dancers wheel 
 around amid the sound of pipes and lyres. 
 
 The description by Hesiod 3 of a similar scene is more elabo- 
 rate. The city is given over to festivities and 
 dances : the bride is being conducted to her fut- : ^"n^Tod 
 
 ure home preceded by maidens with torches, and 
 followed by two choruses, one with pipes, the other with lyres. 
 There is an advance here over the choral exercise exhibited in 
 the threnos. In the latter, the chorus accompany their dance 
 only with sighs, while in the hymenasus the choruses accom- 
 pany their dances with instrumental music. 
 
 The hymenaeus is found, in later times, among the works 
 of Alcman. Sappho left an entire book of hy- 
 menasa, which were written in hexameter, and 
 were intended to be sung by choruses of young 
 men and women. 4 
 
20 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The Hyporcheme is mentioned in the Iliad, in the descrip- 
 
 tion of the shield of Achilles. 1 Here are dancing 
 
 The Hyporcheme yout } ls arf d gailv-attired maidens holding one 
 
 in the Iliad J . . 
 
 another by the wrist. At times they dance 
 nimbly around ; at other times they dance in rows opposite to 
 one another. Within the chorus sits the singer with the </">/'/' '/'^ 
 and two tumblers (xupurryT^pts). 
 
 In one of the Homeric hymns, 2 there is a 
 
 The Hyporcheme J . 
 
 in the Hymn similar scene. Here the chorus is composed ot 
 
 to Apoiio ten goddesses as dancers ; Ares and Hermes are 
 
 the tumblers, and Apollo plays on the cithara. In the Odys- 
 
 sey, 3 at the home of Menelaus, two dancers 
 
 The Hyporcheme / ^ ~ x w ^ ee l around to the music of the 
 
 in the Odyssey 
 
 These dances fully correspond to the definition of a hypor- 
 cheme, which is a choral dance in which the ac- 
 tion described by the singer is represented with 
 mimic gesture by individuals that come from 
 the body of the chorus for this purpose. 
 
 The hyporcheme was popular during every age of Greece, 
 and is at the present day performed in various 
 P arts of Greece at Popular festivals. Thalctas 
 is said to have composed hyporchemes ; they 
 were composed also by Baccylides, Simonides the younger, and 
 by Pindar. They occur also in the works of the dramatists, 
 as, e. g., the ode to Pan in the Philoctetes, and the closing ode 
 in the Lysistrata. 
 
 The antiquity of the hyporcheme is seen in the fact that 
 Homer, in describing it, says that it is like unto 
 
 of^h^orcheme that danCC which, wide GnOSSUS, DadalllS 
 
 contrived for fair-haired Ariadne. 4 Whether we 
 are to understand these words literally, and believe that the 
 dance described on the shield of Achilles was patterned after a 
 similar dance in Crete, or are to understand Daedalus to be the 
 eponymous genius of all Greece, the fact is clear that at the 
 time of Homer, the hyporcheme was an old form of dance. 
 
 - 590ff. 2 Apol. Pyth., 10-26. 3 o 17ff. 2 490-4-95. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 
 
 21 
 
 characteristic 
 
 The chief characteristic of the hyporcheme was its mimetic 
 character; this feature existed to a greater or 
 less degree in all dancing, but in the hyporcheme 
 more than in any other kind. The love of imi- 
 tation, then, of vtwffts, which is so prominent a characteristic in 
 the last class of Greek poetry, the drama, is seen to be already 
 existing, in this prehistoric hyporcheme. 
 
 Parthenia,& form of poetry that was extensively cultivated 
 by the melic poets from Alcman to Pindar, are 
 seen to have been in use at the time of Homer. 
 In the Iliad is reference to such a dance in honor 
 of Diana : 
 
 t^'Oa^JLOtfftv >3(M na Hsfao'j.&r.w The instance 
 
 '' in the Iliad 
 
 Respon tTthTi1iad 
 
 in Homer 
 
 Mention is made in Homer of a choral exercise that bears 
 resemblance to that of the historic chorus when 
 just passing into the drama. 2 At the close of 
 the first book of the Iliad, at the feast of the 
 gods on Olympus, the Muses are represented as singing respon- 
 sively : 
 
 A^oy, y/ ^ Jrro /./</, 
 
 Summary 
 
 O f choral forms 
 in Homer 
 
 and in Hesiod 
 
 0\ al Hetdov a<>.z>fx'>i>.^<t.'. (*> 
 
 Summary of choral forms in Homer and in Hesiod. It will 
 be observed that in the choral exercises described 
 
 TT i . -,-T . . 
 
 in Homer and in Hesiod there is no sure instance 
 of both singing and dancing by a stationarv 
 
 t _ V1 . , 
 
 chorus. Thus in the paean sung by the Achaeans 
 at the sacrificial feast in the first book of the Iliad, there is no 
 reference to dancing. In the hymenaeus, the bands of singers 
 are in motion. In the parthenia, the choruses dance, but do 
 not sing. In the hyporcheme, also, the chorus dance, but do 
 not sing. In the threnos, Homer does not assign to the chorus 
 any dancing, nor are the Muses at the close of the first book of 
 the Iliad said to accompany their responsive singing with 
 dance. Whether, in this instance, we should understand that 
 
 1 // 182f. 2 Cf. p.4*ft-below. 3 A 602ff. 
 
22 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTl'RY 
 
 the Muses accompanied their singing with some kind of gesture, 
 and, in the threnos described in the Iliad > we should understand 
 that the mourners accompanied their sighs with gesture, we 
 have nothing to guide us in forming an opinion. If we consider 
 that such was the case, we have examples in Homer of both 
 singing and dancing by stationary choruses. The dithyramb, 
 the choral song in honor of Dionysus, is not mentioned in either 
 Homer or Hesiod ; yet it is seen that nearly every kind of choral 
 poetry that was developed in the historic ages of Greece existed 
 at the time of the'Homeric poems. All that the ages subsequent 
 to Homer could do was to develope these elementary poems. 
 
 5 THE DIVISIONS OF LYRIC POETRY 
 
 There is an interval of centuries between the time of the 
 Lyric poetry performance of the choral exercises that are 
 
 includes mentioned by Homer, and that of the cultiva- 
 
 tion of the chorus of historic times. Lyric 
 poetry may henceforth be understood to include only poetry 
 The elegiac that is called 'melic/ The distinctive feature of 
 
 and the iambic this poetry is its necessary accompaniment of 
 music, and often of rhythmic movement. The 
 elegiac and the iambic poetry are thus excluded, and may be 
 classed, as they were by the Greeks of the fifth century B. C., 
 under the head of -r ; . 
 
 Melic poetry may be divided into two classes, that of the 
 ^Eolic school of Lesbos, and. that 'of the Doric 
 choral poetry. These two schools of poetn r 
 
 into two schools j-rr , i /TM r- 
 
 dmer in every essential respect. The former 
 received its name from its being cultivated by the ^Eolians, 
 and especially in the island of Lesbos. The latter received its 
 The differences name from the fact that it was first cultivated 
 between under Dorian influences, and in the Doric Pelo- 
 
 ponnesus and Sicily, though subsequently it 
 flourished in all parts of Greece. The dialect of the former 
 school is the^Eolic, that of the latter is the Doric, or the Epic in 
 which Doric forms are mingled. The former school is secu- 
 lar, and is devoted to personal interests ; the latter is often 
 religious, and is public. The former school is, in general, 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CH OKI'S 23 
 
 intended to be sung by a single voice ; the latter is intended for 
 many voices. 
 
 As melic poetry was so intimately connected with music, it 
 is only to be expected that the time of its first cultivation 
 should be coeval with that of the improvement of the art of 
 music. 
 
 6 THE CULTIVATION .OF GREEK MUSIC 
 
 The foundation of Greek music was the tetrachord. This 
 sufficed as an accompaniment of the heroic min- 
 strel, as it sufficed, also, for the elegiac and the The tetrachord 
 iambic poets, at least early in their hist or y. 
 But it is evident that such an instrument would have proved 
 but a meagre accompaniment of an elaborate choral ode. 
 
 The founder of Greek music was Terpander (676 B. C.), 
 the Lesbian, who reduced to a system the differ- 
 ent modes of singing that then prevailed. His Terpander 
 system, though in succeeding ages it was im- 
 proved, was not materially departed from. His chief glory 
 consists in his having increased the number of 
 strings of the lyre to seven. Nearly contempor- oiympus 
 ary with Terpander was Olympus, whose con- 
 tribution to the development of music was the improvement 
 of the flute. Thaletas (620) of Crete marks the 
 third epoch in the cultivation of Greek music. Thaletas 
 His work was to carry forward the improve- 
 ments made by Terpander ; and like him he made his home at 
 Sparta, the city that was then the musical centre of the whole 
 world. Chiefly to these three men, Terpander, Olympus and 
 Thaletas, is due the credit of bringing music to the high state 
 of development that was not surpassed in the time of Pindar. 
 Aided by the improvements made in music, toward the close of 
 the seventh century 7 B. C., melic poetry starts on a course of 
 cultivation, and within a century and a half from that time 
 reaches its highest state of development. 
 
24 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 S7 CHORAL EXERCISES OF THE ^EOLIC SCHOOL OF POETS 
 
 At the head of the ^Eolic school stands Sappho, whose 
 poetic activity extended from about 610 B. C. 
 to about 570 B. C. Her poetry, in general, like 
 that of the other representatives of this school was intended to 
 Songs be sung by a single voice. It is, however, well 
 
 for a single voice kno wn that during her life-time there were chor- 
 uses in Lesbos ; accordingly, we are not surprised to find that 
 she wrote poetry for choral representation. This is certain- 
 ly the case with her marriage songs. The hy- 
 foTclforuses menasus of Sappho from which the poem of 
 
 Catullus 62 was imitated, was sung by choruses 
 of men and women. In this poem, as in the imitation of 
 Catullus, the two choruses advance to meet each other, the 
 one chorus reproaching, the other praising, the evening star be- 
 cause he led the bride to the groom. Numerous other frag- 
 ments of the hymenasals of Sappho remain, all of which are 
 characterized by the intensity of feeling that is the leading feat- 
 ure in all of her works. 
 
 Anacreon, though an Ionian, of the Island of Teos, must be 
 classed as a member of the AZolic school, be- 
 H^chTra^ter cause of the nature of his poetry. He was essen- 
 tially an 4dle singer of an empty day,' whose 
 only sorrow was for the approach of 'd/rfaUov Y*I ("**' > a sorrow 
 that had caused unhappiness to poets and heroes as far back 
 as the time of Homer. Anacreon had the bent of mind of 
 Sappho without any of her intensity ; and Ana- 
 fb^chTruLs creon, too, wrote for choral exercises, for some 
 
 at least of his poems were sung by choruses of 
 women at nocturnal festivals. 
 
 There is no evidence that Alcaeus, the re- 
 poetry maining representative of the ^Eolic school, 
 composed for choruses. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 25 
 
 8 CHORAL EXERCISES OF THE DORIC SCHOOL OF POETS 
 
 Turning to the other division of melic poetry, the Doric 
 choral poetry, we shall be able to trace the de- 
 velopment of the chorus to the time when it be- Fu . rth " h de T elop - 
 
 ment of the chorus 
 
 comes an element in the drama through a suc- 
 cession of steps in which there will be no break. 
 
 A distinguishing characteristic of this kind of poetry is the 
 complicated, and often artificial, structure of its 
 strophe. The origin of the strophe is doubtless 
 coeval with that of lyric poetry. It is essential, 
 in singing, that the voice be allowed to rest at intervals. We 
 need not doubt that when Achilles was found 
 by the visiting chiefs, in the ninth book of the 
 
 of the strophe 
 
 Iliad, singing to the accompaniment of the lyre, 
 he divided his song into strophes. 
 
 In later times, the elegiac distich serves as 
 an illustration of the strophe, as the voice rests The str P he 
 
 in elegiac poetry 
 
 at the close of every other verse. 
 
 In a narrower sense, the term strophe is confined to two 
 varieties, the Melic and the Doric. The chief 
 characteristic of the former is its brevity, the The Meli de S t c r r i bed 
 usual number of verses in the strophe beiiig four, 
 the last of which is commonly catalectic. 
 
 The Doric strophe is much more complicated than is the 
 Melic. The number of verses is not limited to 
 four, and, with the increase in number of verses, The ^a^Eed 
 there is a corresponding increase in complexity 
 of rhythmic form. To understand these rhythmic forms, the 
 ear frequently needed the aid of the eye, and so the science of 
 orchestic was required. The climax of this class of strophe was 
 reached when the epode was added. As the 
 strophe and its corresponding antistrophe were The Epode 
 
 sung by the chorus in motion, so the epode was 
 sung by the chorus standing in its original position. 
 
 It need not be doubted that the origin of antistrophic, as 
 well as of s trophic, recital can be referred to pre- 
 historic times. In the responsive recital of the 
 Muses on Mt. Olympus, as narrated at the close 
 
26 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 of the first book of the Iliad, is seen the germ of the compli- 
 cated strophe and antistrophe of the most highly cultivated 
 choruses. 
 
 Alcman, the Lydian, represents a period of progress in the 
 development of choral poetry. While Mimner- 
 Sofl"c^n rar " mus is s in g in g nis elegies, Sappho her love- 
 poems, and Solon his elegiac and iambic poems, 
 Alcman has left his home in Asia Minor, and, like those other 
 poets who were summoned to Sparta in the seventh century 
 B. C., has come to that city and is devoting his genius to the 
 service of Dorian masters. 
 
 Alcman is for us the first of the choral poets ; his predeces- 
 sors, Terpander, Thaletas, Polymnestus, were 
 Iceman"* 801 " 5 proficient in the training of choruses, in adding 
 new rhythmical action, and especially in com- 
 posing music for their choruses ; but Alcman was all this, and 
 also a poet. His compositions were afterward 
 read and en JJ ecl by those that had not wit- 
 nessed their public recital. The words of his 
 predecessors were subordinated to the music; with Alcman 
 this relation was reversed. 
 
 Terpander, Thaletas and Polymnestus had composed for 
 only religious exercises ; Alcman devoted most 
 
 afo'aslons of his enius to the celebration of secular oc- 
 casions. 
 
 Parthenia were an especial favorite with Alcman. The 
 term 'parthenia' may be applied to two different 
 kinds of composition. It may be used to denote 
 songs executed by choruses of maidens in honor 
 of certain gods: in this sense they are sacred songs. In the 
 other sense, parthetiia denote songs in honor of certain maid- 
 ens : in this sense they are secular. Alcman devoted his genius 
 to both these classes of parthenia, but chiefly to the secular 
 class. The parthenia of Bacchylides, Simonides, and Pindar 
 were exclusively of the sacred order. 
 
 The chorus of Alcman differed in an essential respect from 
 that of Pindar in that with the former poet the 
 
 Features of 
 
 -s choruses chorus did not become the organ of the poet ex- 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT or THE CHORUS 27 
 
 pressing only the thoughts of the poet. This feature, except 
 in a very few instances, was an invariable characteristic of the 
 chorus of Pindar. In the choruses of Alcrnan, the maidens 
 often speak in their own persons, and not unfrequently a lyric 
 dialogue is carried on between the poet, who was the chorus- 
 leader, and the chorus. 
 
 Besides parthenia, Alcman composed hymns to the gods, a 
 hymn to Castor and Pollux, paeans, and hymen- His other 
 
 seals, as well as erotic songs. Of these, the last compositions 
 
 class was sung by a single person, the others 
 were sung by choruses. 
 
 The metres of Alcman show a step in advance of those of 
 his predecessor, Terpander ; of this latter poet 
 about twenty verses are extant, all in hexam- His metres 
 
 eter or heavy spondaic metres, which are appro- 
 priate for his nomes. On the other hand, the varied style of 
 Alcman's compositions required a more varied metre; yet they 
 are much less complicated than are the metres of the later lyric 
 poets. 
 
 Alcman and his predecessors made their homes at Sparta. 
 Henceforth, the cultivators of choral poetry Remaining 
 
 live in various parts of the Dorian confederacy, choral poets 
 
 and none of them have any connection with otats P arta 
 Sparta. 
 
 Stesichorus flourished at about 650 B. C. His originality 
 led him in a path totally different from that of The originality 
 Alcman. We find in his productions all the ele- of stesichoms 
 ments of the most highly developed choral poetry. The chorus 
 of Alcman was a popular chorus ; that of Stesi- His chorus limited 
 chorus was limited in size, and consisted of in size 
 
 combinations of several rows, with eight dancers in each. The 
 great accomplishment of Stesichorus was the 
 
 jj-x- rxiT Theepode 
 
 addition of the epode. 
 
 The debt of Stesichorus to the epic was great. In metre, 
 he varied but little from the hexameter ; in dia- The epico lyric 
 lect, he used the Epic with but a slight tinge of hymns 
 
 Doric; so, also, in subject-matter, he was largely 
 
28 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 indebted to the Epic. Stesichorus lived in an age when the 
 Epic was becoming vapid; accordingly, people were losing 
 their taste for it ; yet they still wished to bring into their wor- 
 ship of the present the legends of the past. The whole tendency 
 of the age was toward the cultivation of lyric poetry. The 
 originality of Stesichorus was displayed in uniting these two 
 kinds of poetry. He adapted the heroic legends to a lyric treat- 
 ment, composing for the great national festivals of Sicily hymns 
 the subjects of which covered the whole circle of Epic tradition. 1 
 Ibycus of Rhegium was born at about the 
 n ;^ c " s . time of the death of Stesichorus. He devoted 
 
 of Rhegmm 
 
 choral poetry to two uses. Some of his frag- 
 ments have Epic titles, showing that he belonged to the school 
 
 of Stesichorus, while others are devoted to con- 
 He belongs to fessions of love. His later life was spent at the 
 
 two schools 
 
 court of Polycrates in Samos together with 
 Anacreon, and the love poems are perhaps due to this latter 
 poet's influence. 
 
 Anacreon composed love-songs for recital to the accom- 
 paniment of a lyre of twenty strings without a 
 chorus. The similar songs of Ibycus were alwavs 
 
 of Ibycus * 
 
 for a chorus. This fact is shown by the length 
 of the strophes, and by the complex structure of the verses. 
 These love-songs were composed for the celebration of 
 family festivals, or birth-days, or for similar 
 occasions, at which times the poet and his 
 chorus took their positions near the houses 
 of the persons celebrated. 
 
 The remaining masters of choral poetry added no new ele- 
 AH elements ments ; they merely perfected the elements that 
 
 now given already existed, and extended this kind of 
 
 to choral poetry poetr y to all varieties of Subjects. 
 
 Thus Simonides of Ceos, the most prolific of all the lyric 
 poets, extended the choral hymn to celebrating 
 contemporary men. Originally, the hymn had 
 been devoted to the celebration of the gods ; by 
 
 1 Among the subjects of these hymns are: The Fall of Troy, Helena, and The 
 Oresteia. 
 
Till; DEVELOPMENT OF THU CHORTS 21) 
 
 Alcman it had been extended to demi-gods, as in his hymn to 
 Castor and Pollux ; Stesichorus had extended the hymn to cele- 
 brating the heroes, and to such hymns was his highest genius 
 given ; Simonides advanced a step further, and, in his famous 
 epinikia, devoted the hymn to celebrating contemporary men. 
 
 Choral poetry has now completely triumphed over all other 
 kinds of poetry. A lyric poet makes his home ric oets 
 
 iirst in one city, then in another ; and now for compose 
 
 the first time he sells his genius for gold. Simon- 
 ides took the initiative in this direction, and we find him now 
 with Hiero at Syracuse, now withtheScopadsinThessaly, and, 
 finally, at the court of Hipparchus at Athens, the 3'ounger con- 
 temporary at this last place of Anacreon and Lasus. 
 
 Bacchylides, the nephew of Simonides, and his contemporary 
 at the court of Hiero, devoted his choruses to 
 lighter themes than did his uncle, dealing, in 
 great measure, with love and wine. 
 
 The lofty Pindar, 'the perfect lyric poet,' devoted the chorus 
 to all uses save that of love. Of his composi- 
 tions more remains than of any other lyric poet. ^fWndar 
 
 His Epinikia are his most famous poems. 
 
 In contrast with these later lyric poets stands Timocreon. 
 He quarreled with Simonides, and his lampoons 
 and satires, which in substance differed not at all ,,f Thnocreon 
 
 from those of Hipponax or Archilochus, were put 
 in the ponderous choral form ; yet he differed from his contem- 
 poraries in this respect that while they wrote for pay, he, like 
 the aristocratic poets of ages before him, spurned to sell his 
 
 genius for money. 
 
 THI-: WORSHIP OF DIOXYSl'S 
 
 It is evident that the poetry of Pindar and his contempor- 
 aries would not satisfy the hearts of the people 
 of democratic Athens." The splendor of Pindar's of poe \"^ e ^d 
 art was high, but the occasions on which he 
 used it were often trifling. Famed for the celebration of A'ictor- 
 ies at the great national festivals, he just as freely celebrated a 
 trivial victory, provided he was paid for doing so. This poetry 
 
30 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CEXTl'RY 
 
 was in the hands of the aristocrats. It was composed for pat- 
 rons, and for pay. Worship was paid the gods, not by the peo- 
 ple themselves, but for them by professional singers.. The 
 people, therefore, demanded a different kind of festival, one in 
 which they could feel that they participated themselves. 
 
 This festival in which all could participate was furnished by 
 the worship of the god Dion\\sus. The reasons 
 whv the worship of Dionvsus was popular mav 
 
 ramb was popular . . 
 
 be reduced to two, the enthusiasm connected with 
 the god, and the fact that he was the wine-god. From the 
 earliest times, the dithyramb was a JOA^OUS song, character- 
 ized by license in poetry and music ; it was the turbulent song 
 of the Greeks. At the time of Archilochus, it had obtained a 
 position of some importance, for he says : 
 
 The paean of Apollo was always solemn and stately ; the paean 
 of Dionysus retained many of the oriental attributes that it had 
 before entering Greece. 
 
 the drama The dithyramb was the parent of the Attic 
 
 drama. We can see in the dithyramb two feat- 
 ures that rendered it capable of development 
 into the drama. 
 
 The worship of Dionysus was two-fold. It celebrated him 
 (1) as the god of wine; and, again, it was the form 
 
 The dithyramb 
 
 supplied oppor- used to convey sympathy with the changing 
 tunities for form- seasons of the year. The struggles of Dionysus 
 were seen in the struggles that Nature makes as 
 she breaks forth from the cold winter into the warm spring. 
 For this reason, his festivals came in the months nearest to the 
 shortest days of the year, the Rural Dionysia, the Lenaea, the 
 Anthesteria, the Greater Dionysia coming in the months corres- 
 ponding to our December, January, February, March, respect- 
 ively. As the participants stood at these festivals around the 
 altars, they thought that they actually saw the god, now dying, 
 now successful, now put to flight, now returning victorious ; 
 
 1 Frag. 72 Bergk. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 3t 
 
 and they all participated in the feelings of joy or sorrow, as the 
 occasion demanded. In the course of time, as knowledge ex- 
 tended, this belief in the actual presence of the god vanished, 
 yet the belief that Dionysus was an anthropomorphic being, 
 and the sympathy for his sufferings remained. There was, in a 
 sympathy like this, ample opportunity for constructing imag- 
 ined methods of escape of the god from death, ample opportun- 
 ity for constructing plots; and it was from the dithyramb that 
 sang of these escapes of Dionysus that traged^ r was developed, 
 It evidently could not have been developed from the dithyramb 
 that sang of the joys of the god ; and this belief is confirmed by 
 the tradition recorded by Herodotus, 1 that in Sicyon, Cleisthe- 
 nes transferred back to Dionysus, as to one to whom they were 
 due, tragic choruses that had been sung celebrating the sorrows 
 of Adrastus. We see, then, in the worship of Dionysus, oppor- 
 tunity for forming plots. 
 
 The remaining element in the Dionysiac worship that made 
 it capable of development into the drama is seen < 2 > 
 
 The dithyramb 
 
 in the forms assumed by the participants at the supplies opp or- 
 
 festivals. This was caused bv their desire to tumties for 
 
 ,"'...., ing characters. 
 
 approach as close as possible to the gods with 
 whom they sympathized. As he was a nature-god, it was 
 only natural for his sympathizers to appear as far as possible 
 in the forms in \vhich nature appears. They therefore assumed 
 the guise of Satyrs, Nymphs, Panes. They put goat-skins 
 around their loins, they colored their bodies with juices of 
 various plants, and put masks upon their faces. Thus they 
 were more like their god in form, and, accordingly, nearer to 
 him in sympathy. The festival, thus, afforded opportunity for 
 assuming various characters. The worship of Dionysus, then, 
 contained the two elements that made it capable of development 
 into the drama, (1) occasions for forming plots; (2) occasions 
 for assuming characters. 
 
 1 Herod, v. 67 : 
 
 -a Ttatisa anntn Tftaf.xoifft ynfmlai typat/)ov, r</v t).kv Jiovnvtr; on r 
 /Tcc, rJv ok 'AftpOLffTov. hXziffftl^e^ de %oftot)$ [j.kv rw JrovWw (iitdtox. 
 The force of a.~innf/.t should be observed. 
 
32 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTVRY 
 
 HO THE DITHYRAMB OF ARION 
 
 Arion was the first to produce a choral performance of the 
 \rioncuitivatcd dithyramb. The worship of Dionysus was 
 the dithyramb especially popular at Lesbos, thehomeof Arion ; 
 
 accordingly, when he came to the wealthy city 
 of Corinth, during the reign of the tyrant Periander, he devoted 
 himself to the cultivation of the form of worship with which he 
 had been so long in sympathy. 
 
 Arion made his improvements in the dithyramb at about 
 Thecharacteris- the beginning of the sixth century B. C., more 
 tics of Arion's than half a century before Thespis (535 B. C.) 
 
 introduced anactor, thereby con verting the trag- 
 ic dithyramb into tragedy. The chorus of Arion was called 
 'circular,' which indicates that the satyrs performed their 
 dances in a circle around the burning altar. This circular form 
 was retained till the time of Thespis, who arranged the chorus 
 in the form of a rectangle. The choral dithyramb of Arion was 
 not so boisterous and licentious as was the dithyramb upon 
 which he built, but honored Dio^^sus in a more solemn manner, 
 the worship resembling the dignified choral worship of Apollo. 
 Arion is said to have invented for his dithyrambic chorus a new 
 kind of dance, which corresponded to the solemn dance, the 
 ifi.ft.sA iv. . o f tragedy . 
 
 The dithyramb as arranged by Arion was under the charge 
 
 of a leader (izdpziw) whose duty it was to super- 
 
 intend the choral dances, and to take a distinct 
 
 part himself, which was to sing odes in praise 
 of the god, his part being introduced merely for the purpose of 
 relieving the dancers. It need not be doubted that these songs 
 
 of the exarchon were the only parts of the dithy- 
 L b companTment ramb that had anv considerable artistic merit. 
 
 The musical accompaniment was of two kinds : 
 for the ruder dances it was the flute, which was the instrument 
 originally used at the boisterous satyr-dances ; for the accom- 
 paniment of the more refined words of the exarchon the lyre 
 was used. Arion was, in fact, the most distinguished cithara- 
 player of his time. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT. OF THE CHORUS 33 
 
 Thus far, in its course of development, had the dithyramb 
 advanced in the time of Arion. It was a comparatively solemn 
 body of men, reciting verses, 1 singing antistrophically, 2 and 
 was under the leadership of an exarchon, who The size 
 
 himself sang in the celebration of the god. Of ofthedithy- 
 
 how many men the chorus consisted we have no 
 direct information. Simonides refers to a dithyramb of his 
 own that consisted of a chorus of fifty men. Whether this 
 number dated from the time of Arion is a matter of conjecture. 
 
 11 THE DEVELOPMENT OF TRAGEDY FROM THE DITHYRAMB 
 
 Aristotle says that tragedy derived its origin from the ex- 
 archon of the dithvrambic chorus, that after 
 
 - , - The first step 
 
 many changes tragedy assumed the form that i s the extension 
 it has in .^Eschvlus and his successors. 3 The of the part 
 
 -.,. i r 1 11 of the exarchon. 
 
 dithyramb of Anon is but a choral exercise, 
 \vhichis relieved at intervals by thesongs of its leader. The first 
 of the changes referred to by Aristotle may be considered to be 
 an extension of the part taken by the leader. Instead of sing- 
 ing a few words in praise of the god, he recited a longer pas- 
 sage, narrating some trial that the god had undergone. He 
 would even assume the character of the god. These passages 
 became longer and more important, the leader at times ad- 
 dressing the chorus, and bringing forth some special feature in 
 the trials of the god that the chorus in its following ode could 
 illustrate. The brief extent of these interruptions of the leader 
 as compared with the songs of the satyrs may be seen by the 
 name that was given to them. They are called 'episodes,' a 
 name that the}' retain in the fully developed drama, and which 
 means the same as our \vord 'parentheses 1 . 
 
 The next step was the celebrating of the sorrows of persons 
 other than Dionysus, and this was but the re- 
 
 vival of a custom that had been practiced at The second 
 
 . is the extension 
 
 Sicyon, and had been discontinued by Cleis- of the subjects. 
 thenes. This was an important step. As long 
 as the festival confined itself to celebrating the sorrows of this 
 one god, the opportunity for forming plots was limited; but 
 
 1 Aristot., Poet. IV. 2 Aristot., Problem. XIX:1 5. 3 Poet. IV. 
 
34 THE ATTIC STAd/t OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 when the whole range of mythology was thrown open from 
 which to draw the subjects of the exercises, the opportunity for 
 forming plots was indefinitely extended. Though the trials of 
 Dionysus were abandoned for those of heroes of mythology, 
 the festival was always a part of the worship of the god of 
 wine. 
 
 The dithj-ramb has been brought to the time of Thespis. 
 
 It has been developed thus far on Doric soil. In 
 The dithyramb Athens, on Ionian soil, it becomes tragedy. This 
 becomes tragedy event is associated with the name of Thespis, 
 
 who came to Athens from Icaria at about the 
 year 535 B. C. The dithyramb at this time was popular at 
 Athens, though it had not in that state reached the stage of 
 cultivation that it had reached in the Doric states; it con- 
 tained more of the wild orgiastic rites that originally attended 
 it. Peisistratus, in his desire to lift up the common people, lent 
 his aid to the development of this popular form of worship. 
 
 The service of Thespis was to add to the chorus of satyrs 
 The final step is an ac ^or who was distinct from the chorus, and 
 the addition who took the part that had previously been 
 
 taken by the exarchon ; and this act of Thespis 
 converts the dithyramb into tragedy. 
 
 $\'2 THE FURTHER DEVELOPMENT OF TRAGEDY 
 
 Our information concerning Thespis is limited, as it is also 
 concerning the tragic poets that come between him and AZs- 
 chylus. It would appear that in some of the 
 If^hes^r plays of Thespis the chorus assumed the forms 
 
 of satyrs, while in other plays the chorus ap- 
 peared as men. 
 
 With Phrynichus this last fact became a regular feature, 
 his chorus assuming the character that was 
 us most in sympathy with the action of the play, 
 thus, e. g., if the play was the 'Capture of Mile- 
 tus', the chorus appeared as citizens of Miletus. 
 
 A contemporary of Phrynichus was Choeri- 
 lus, of whom about all we know is to be gained 
 from the verse, '' IhUa ,"i> /Sv/^/s'V ay* .\V/*!/o? h - 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OP THE CHORI'S 35 
 
 TitfKiit 1 . From this we may infer that Choeriltis was famed for 
 composing tragedies in which the chorus con- 
 sisted of satyrs, a practice that had probably His chorus, 
 been by Thespis in part superseded by that of 
 presenting a chorus of men. It would appear that this latter 
 practice rapidly grew in favor, and, with it, the custom of 
 making the whole exercise more calm and dignified. This we 
 may infer from the complaint that at about this time arose 
 among the people, V>'^> -ooc rov J^v^o*,/,' which apparently in- 
 dicated the discontent of the common people with the practice 
 of substituting the chorus of men for the chorus 
 of satyrs. This discontent was respected by the 
 poet Pratinas, who is said to have brought 
 forth the satyr-drama as a permanent feature of the festival ; 
 and from this time it was the custom for a poet to present 
 three tragedies in which the chorus was composed of men, and 
 one in which the chorus was composed of satyrs, all four 
 tragedies being connected in subject. 
 
 The satyr-drama has been described as a sportive tragedy. 
 The subjects of this kind of tragedy were drawn 
 from the same source as were the subjects of the 
 regular tragedy, but they were treated in a man- 
 ner more suited to the presence of satyrs. Any wild, striking 
 adventure was suited to the satyric tragedy; any scenes drawn 
 from rude nature were especially appropriate. The adventures 
 of Hercules were frequently depicted, and in the only extant 
 satyr-drama, the Cyclops of Euripides, the chief characters 
 are Ulysses and the savage Cyclops, the scene being laid in 
 front of the rustic cave of the Cyclops. 
 
 We come now to /Eschylus, \vho is the real founder of trag- 
 edy. The productions of his predecessors had 
 been hardly more than choral exercises. The ^vschyius. 
 
 part taken by the actor had been entirely sub- 
 ordinate. The tragedies of Phrynichus are said by Aristo- 
 phanes to be 'exceedingly sv.eet', and, as songs of such a char- 
 
36 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTl'RY 
 
 acter, they were popular at the time of the great comedian. 1 
 ./Eschylus shortened the parts of the chorus, yet 
 in his Suppliccs the part of the chorus is three- 
 fifths of the whole play. In the other plays of 
 
 ^Eschylus, except the Prometheus, the choral parts are about 
 one-half of the whole composition. The great 
 
 a second actor. change that ^Eschylus made in the external 
 characteristics of tragedy was the introduction 
 
 of a second actor. 
 
 Sophocles added a third actor. The tragedies of ^Eschylus 
 were presented in tetralogies. Sophocles in- 
 ' dC< creased the vital action in the individual plays 
 
 actor 
 
 by setting the example of acting his tragedies 
 each as a separate whole. He further diminished the length of 
 
 the choral parts. These vary, in the plays of 
 thechorai odes. Sophocles, from about one-fourth of the whole 
 
 play, in the Ajax, to about one-seventh of the 
 whole, in the Antigone. 
 
 Euripides could add nothing to the external features of 
 
 tragedy. The important changes that he ef- 
 Euripides fected were all internal; vet he reduced still 
 
 shortened 
 
 the choral odes. further the lengths of the choral parts. They 
 vary in his plays from about one-fourth of the 
 whole, in the Bacchae, to about one-ninth of the whole, in the 
 Orestes. 
 
 Before the time of ^Eschylus, the chorus had been practical- 
 Decline of the ty everything. Its action was the chief part of 
 
 choms as the exercise ; but, from the time of ^Eschylus, the 
 
 chorus steadily declined in importance. The 
 decline in amount assigned to it has already been noted ; but 
 there was another, and a still more important, aspect of its 
 decline. This aspect has to do with its importance as a living 
 element in the play. The Supplices of ^Eschylus takes its name 
 from the suppliant maidens, and the whole interest in the plav 
 centers in the fate of the maiden choreutae. In the Prometheus, 
 on the other hand, the choreutae share the fate of the rebellious 
 
 1 Arihtoph., Av. 748ff; Vesp. 219ff. 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT or Till- CHORUS 37 
 
 Titan, yet the interest in the play centers around him, not 
 around them. The object of a chorus such as 
 this one seems to be to comment on the course i(k . a , cno ^ 
 
 of events and to relieve the action by choral odes 
 that speak the sentiments of the poet, but that are connected 
 with the main action. This is the type of chorus seen in the 
 later plays of ^Eschylus, and is the type seen in Sophocles. 
 Tragedy is now at its perfect development; this kind of chorus, 
 therefore, may be considered the ideal chorus. By Euripides 
 the decline in the importance of the chorus is carried a step be- 
 yond the position assigned to it by Sophocles and the later 
 plays of ^Eschylus. In Euripides, the choral odes, far from 
 invariably being connected with the subject-matter of the plays, 
 often soar into mythology, at times having no connection at 
 'ill with the matter in hand. It might almost be thought that 
 Euripides had these choral odes stored away, and produced at 
 the time the one that his fancy dictated. This separation of the 
 chorus may have been one cause of the lack of success of Eurip- 
 ides, and may help to explain why he gained but five victories 
 in a life-time in which he is reported to have composed nearly a 
 hundred tragedies. This separation of thechorus is carried still 
 further by the tragedians of the fourth century, especially by 
 Agathon and Ion. Under these poets, the choral odes were 
 confessedly for the purpose of relieving the stress on the actors 
 of continuous action, and of supplying music, filling, in fact, 
 exactly the position occupied by the orchestra in the theatre of 
 the present day. 
 
 13 THE SUBSEQUENT CULTIVATION OF THE DITHYRAMB, AND OF 
 
 LYRIC POETRY. 
 
 The dithyramb in the form that it had received from Arion 
 continued for a long time to be sung in Doric The (lithyraml) 
 states. For a short time after the innovations of continued 
 
 Thespis, it continued in favor at Athens, but 
 riot later than the close of the sixth century B. C. As Thespis 
 made the dithyramb into tragedy, so L/asus 
 (503 B. C.), the teacher in music of Pindar, gave 
 to the old dithvramb a new form, that was 
 
38 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENT CRY 
 
 familiarly called the 'Attic' dithyramb. In this form the chorus 
 of satyrs was abandoned for a chorus of men, and the music 
 was more highly cultivated, being described as wild and florid, 
 toward the close of the fifth century B. C. degenerating into a 
 type that received much censure from temporary critics. In the 
 4 Attic' dithyramb, the subjects were frequently transferred from 
 Dionysus to mythical heroes. Simonides is said to have com- 
 posed a dithyramb entitled 'Memnon', and Pindar was a com- 
 poser of similar dithyrambs. The fact that dithyrambic 
 contests took place together with contests in tragedy and com- 
 edy is further indication of a considerable cultivation of the 
 'Attic' dithyramb. 
 
 After the rise of the drama, lyric poetry, as a separate 
 branch, existed in but few forms. It is evident 
 that the parthcnia, which had been so popular 
 on Doric soil, could find no place in Athens, 
 where women \vere kept in an almost oriental seclusion ; and 
 the epinikia, which added such splendor to the national festi- 
 vals in the latter half of the fifth century B. C., were aban- 
 doned, as Greece became torn with the strife of war. Thechief 
 duty of lyric poetry now is to supply an element in the drama. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHOKl.'S 
 
 CONTEXTS 
 
 1 The Number of the Choreutae: 
 
 The tragic chorus of fifteen : the comic chorus of twenty-four. 
 
 Sophocles the first to use a tragic chorus of fifteen. 
 
 The tragic chorus of fourteen. 
 
 The tragic chorus of fiity. 
 
 Was the innovation of Sophocles adopted by .Kschylus? 
 
 The tragic chorus of fort}- -eight. 
 
 The changes in the size of the chorus. 
 
 j'J The Position of the Choreutae: 
 
 At its entrance the chorus presented its left side to the spectators. 
 
 The entrance sometimes by the eastern parodos. 
 
 The parts of the chorus. 
 
 The entrance called '/.u~u. l~t>'.y*i'>^ . '/.n.~d. *Uffl. 
 
 Diagram of a chorus entering y.r /.-(/. <7-'.y^>^. 
 
 Diagram of a chorus entering '/.n~<\ "nya. 
 
 The YJL~<I. f!~n'.ynn^ formation common. 
 
 Position of the chorus after reaching the orchestra. 
 
 Position of the left file when the chorus entered by the eastern 
 
 parodos. 
 Position of the chorus during the dialogue, and during the 
 
 stasima. 
 
 Exit of the chorus at the close of. and during the play. 
 Lines in the orchrstra. 
 //;>..'/';/<:">; n'.y<i'.<i.. 
 
 Position of the coryphaeus in a chorus of fifteen. 
 Position of the corypha?us in a chorus of twelve. 
 
 S3 The names of the Choreuta? : 
 
 Their names derived from their positions. 
 
 The titles of the coryphaeus. 
 
 The choregus as coryphaeus. 
 
 The poet as trainer; the choregus, the 'i~nn>.n>i.f;y.<i.tj^ . as 
 
 coryph;eus. 
 The skill of the choreuta.- varied in different files. 
 
 4 A Secondary Chorus. 
 
 //a//</./"/'>/'/'>//'-' / ' 77 '///. TXr//.'"'/. 
 
 Passages in which occurs the word ~a()f/.%O[trjfTj l 'f.fJt., 
 
 l{xamples of -(i.ixi.ydin^'-^'ui.-ii.. and of Tt 
 
 $?> The Choreons : 
 
 The appointment of the choregus. 
 The duties of the choregus. 
 The expenses of the choregus. 
 
40 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 5 The Choregus (Continued) : 
 
 Minor details concerning the choregus. 
 The decline of the choregia. 
 
 6 The Delivery of the Choral Parts : 
 
 The parodoi. 
 
 The stasiina. 
 
 Shorter songs of the whole chorus, 
 
 Words spoken by the corypretis. 
 
 Commoi. 
 
 The delivery of the words in certain doubtful instances. 
 
 The parabasis. 
 
 7 The Costume of the Choreutns; 
 
 The costume of the choreutae in tragedy. 
 The costume of the choreutae in comedy. 
 The costume of the choreutae in the satyric drama. 
 
 1 THE NUMBER OF THE C 
 
 Our knowledge of the size of the tragic and the comic 
 chorus is derived primarily from the state- 
 * ents of ancient writers - T " he scholiast to JBs- 
 
 chorus 15 men; chjlus' EumenideS (585) Says: -<>'>r n -OOY 7ftsh\ 
 
 cho?u e s C 2 f C ^ a *& *"/>*"< li >'<>!> i**>. The scholiast to 
 
 Aristophanes' Equites (589) says: ff^z'.n-^xi: oi </ 
 
 y[>(}^ [l't 'l.k's XW/Jl.tXO$~] C a'sOiiO)'; YjO'Sj Y.<L<. 'f'f; <!.'.'/. firs. O'/.OM nl X'/I i/. raiotil's. 
 
 [x f * * * o' ok -o^:xoc >i. << AifT/nAit^ \-ifa i 'u i 'Mt's'.']. The scholiast 
 to the Aves( 297) says: <>' ^ -o^-cx./c d -<x'>rn-<i. 1/sr. Pollux sa^^s: 1 
 -cv7x{'oexa -,'"(> 'i* 7 ^ & '/."/"'"* These statements show that the 
 comic chorus consisted of twenty-four persons, the tragic of 
 fifteen. 
 
 In two places, Sophocles is recorded as the first one to use 
 sophocies the first a tragic chorus of fifteen. Suidas says : 2 > */>- 
 
 to use a tragic roc //=> rov %npov i'/. iCSVfSXfllfJsxft z'.f>'r l y</.yz 'siutv. JTfiOTSptiy 
 
 duax*ldtM9l*&n; and in the Vit. Soph.a occur 
 
 the \VOrds .' f /.?>-<*> oi /.a>. ran^ y<>j>z>>-<l< -airjfTf/.^ <l';r\ nt'ni}f/.<i. rzv-zx.iiifts.yjj. 
 
 /jj\ TO/ riling >'>-o-/.<>iT-fj'; irc'Y'i. The evidence of these passages 
 shows that the chorus of ^Eschylus consisted of twelve men, 
 and that this number was increased by Sophocles to fifteen. 
 
 1 IV:108. 2 v. -tHftix/S,^. 3 p. 2 Dindf. 
 
THE JLXTI-K'XAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE C//OATX 4-1 
 
 All authorities are agreed that the comic chorus consisted 
 
 of twenty-four persons; 1 but, in three passages, it is asserted 
 
 that the tragic chorus consisted of fourteen per- 
 
 A nth critics ^ivintf 
 
 to the- tm.uk- sons. Inese passages are: %ti(>.o$ os rav Tpayatdcuv 
 
 thorns 1 4- ft't^ifT~a~a r . iz ,,}' ^>/J^CM>.- r^v nk ~ii<r t '>i]>.(i:s /.a\ run^ fio.- 
 
 members. , , - ' 
 
 %ufisi.t-</.\ thxtt-Jftfiss.* It is stated, also, in the Vit. v-^Es. that the 
 number of the choreutae was fourteen. The evidence of these 
 passages as tending to establish a tragic chorus of fourteen 
 persons may be dismissed with the belief that this number does 
 not include the coryphaeus. The chorus of both tragedy and 
 comedy, as it marched into the theater, was rectangular in 
 form. Had the tragic chorus consisted of fourteen men, in or- 
 der that it have a rectangular form, it would have been neces- 
 sary that it be drawn up either two abreast and seven deep, or 
 seven abreast and two deep. In neither of these forms would 
 it have presented a pleasing appearance, as it marched in over 
 the parodos. The chorus of fourteen members may, then, be 
 considered to be the chorus without its leader. 
 
 Pollux says 5 that the tragic chorus consisted of fifty men 
 
 even to the time of the presentation of the Eu- 
 
 I'.iiinx speaks menides, that, on that occasion, the appearance 
 
 of a tragic chorus . 
 
 ot .-><> members. oi mtv Jbnnycs caused so much consternation 
 on the part of the spectators that a law was 
 passed reducing the number. This statement, especially as it 
 is corroborated by no other writer, may be considered an er- 
 ror on the part of Pollux, and we may accept as true the state- 
 ments already quoted from Suidas and the Vit. Soph, that 
 Sophocles increased the size of the chorus of his predecessor 
 from twelve to fifteen members. Even without the authority 
 of these ancient writers, there is no difficulty in believing that 
 Sophocles increased the number of the choreutae. To the other 
 improvements in tragedy that this poet made, such as present- 
 ing single plays instead of tetralogies, increasing the number 
 of actors, and improving the scenic properties, it is easy to be- 
 
 1 Cf. Poll. IV:109; Schol. Arist. Av. 297. 2 Bekk. Anccd. p. 7 -HI. 
 
 3 Tzetzes, Prolegoin, ad. Lycophron p. 254. 
 
 4- Schol. to Dionys. Thrac. Villoiso.i Atiecd. II, p. 17*. ~> I Y:l 1<>. 
 
42 THE ATTIC STAdE or THE FIFTH CEXTl'KV 
 
 lieve that he also increased the size of the chorus, thereby add- 
 ing to the splendor of the singing and dancing, and making 
 easier the division of the chorus into semi-choruses with their 
 two leaders. 
 
 The question now arises whether the innovation of Sopho- 
 cles was adopted by ^Eschylus, in his later plays. 
 
 Was the innova- . . t t - . . . 
 
 tion of sophocies It is impossible to answer this question with 
 adopted certaint3 r . Alberti 1 maintains that even in the 
 
 Supplices of ^Esclwlus the chorus consisted of 
 fifteen members ; and this belief is based, first, upon the fact 
 that all the choral songs except the last one are composed of 
 sets of either three or five strophes, and then upon the assump- 
 tion that the songs composed of three strophes were sung by 
 the choreutae as composed of three ff-ni/<n. and those composed 
 of five strophes \vere sung by the choreutae as composed of five 
 ~Y<J.. Therefore, the argument is, there were fifteen choreutae. 
 But the objection to accepting this conclusion lies in the fact 
 that there is no proof that the choral songs were sung as 
 Alberti assumes. Muff 2 asserts that in the Eumenides and the 
 Agamemnon alone ^Eschylus used a chorus of fifteen, and that 
 Sophocles in the Ajax 3 , one of his earliest plays, used twelve 
 choreutae, not yet having introduced his innovation, and that 
 in the Philoctetes 4 , one of his latest productions, he reverted to 
 the smaller number, twelve. The opinion of Muff concerning 
 the number of choreutae in the Eumenides is shared by M tiller. 5 
 There are two scholia that bear upon this question. 6 Theschol- 
 iumtothe Eumen. (585) that asserts the chorus in that play to 
 have been fifteen in number, Haigh 7 is probably correct in 
 thinking of no value, assuming that the scholiast was influenced 
 by the knowledge of the size of the chorus in later times. The 
 scholiast on Arist. Equit. (589) was no doubt, as Haigh 7 be- 
 lieves influenced by the passage in the Agamemnon, 1344-1371. 
 In this passage, the verses 1344, 1346, 1347 are written in 
 trochaic metre; the verses 1348-1371 consist of twelve iambic 
 couplets, and were, doubtless, spoken by twelve different chor- 
 
 1 De AZs- Chor. Sup. 2 Die Chor. Tech. des Soph. p. 1. 3 pp. 1 ; 52 sq. 
 4- pp. 1 ; 227 sq. 5 Eumenides, p. 18 sq. 6 Already quoted on p 40 above 
 7 Att. Th., p. 263. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS or THh CIIOKI'S 43 
 
 eutie. Whether the first set of three verses was spoken by three 
 of those who spoke verses 1348-1371, or by three other choreu- 
 tae, determines whether the chorus of the play consisted of twelve 
 or of fifteen members; but there is no way of deciding this ques- 
 tion. It is manifestly unsafe to draw a conclusion concerning 
 the size of the chorus from the manner in which the choral odes 
 were sung, until we have more information concerning this 
 feature. It may, however, on general grounds, be considered 
 probable that .-^Eschylus in his later plays had a chorus of 
 fifteen men. The Oresteia was presented ten years after the 
 first appearance of Sophocles, and it is reasonable to believe 
 that by that time /Cschylus would have come to see the ad vant- 
 age of the larger chorus, and that he used it in that trilogy. 
 
 It is safe to follow the authority of Pollux 1 , and believe 
 that, as the dithyrambic chorus consisted T he theory 
 
 of fifty members, so originally the chorus of of Mniier con- 
 
 tragedy consisted of this number. Muller 2 be- ^orufofforty^ 
 lieves that, as soon as tragedy took the tetral- ei * ht 
 
 ogic form, forty-eight choreutas were assigned to the tragic 
 poet, and that he divided them among the plays of the tetral- 
 ogy, as he thought best. If this w as not the case, it must be 
 believed that twelve or fifteen choreutae were assigned to the 
 tragic poet, and that these men acted as chorus in each of the 
 four plays of the tetralogy. The chorus, then, in the only 
 extant 'triology, the Oristeia, would have been obliged in the 
 first play to take the part of old men; in the second, that of 
 women ; in the third, that of Furies ; and, in the satyric drama 
 that completed the tetralogy, that of satyrs. The use of masks 
 would have rendered easy the counterfeiting of whatever exter- 
 nal appearance was required in each individual play, yet it is 
 questioned by Muller whether a single chorus of twelve or fifteen 
 men could have been found, so well trained in their art as to be 
 able to successfully personate, in singing and dancing, charac- 
 ters so different as were those of these four plays, or whether 
 they would have had an amount of physical endurance suffi- 
 cient to enable them to perform the long choral odes of all four 
 
 1 IV:110. 2 Eumenides, p. 10 sq. 
 
44 -THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTl'RY 
 
 plays of the tetralogy. If it is understood that a chorus of 
 forty-eight persons was assigned to the poet, and that a differ- 
 ent portion of them served as chorus in each different pla} r , these 
 difficulties are removed. The assumption that such was the 
 case Muller considers strengthened by the fact that, in each of 
 the plays of this trilogy, appears besides the proper chorus of 
 the play a body of men (or women) resembling the chorus of 
 one of the other plays of the trilogy. Thus, in the Agamemnon, 
 there appear the servants who spread the purple upon which 
 the king on his arrival alights, and these servants bear a gen- 
 eral resemblance to the chorus of old women in the second play, 
 the Choephori. In this latter play, appear, besides the chorus 
 proper, the Eumenides, the very chorus in the third play of the 
 trilogy, and, finally, in the Eumenides, there appear, besides the 
 chorus of Eumenides, both the female escort, which suggests the 
 chorus of women in the second play, and the Council of Areo- 
 pagites, who suggest the chorus of men in the first play ; and it 
 is noticeable that, at the close of the Eumenides, all three chor- 
 uses leave the theatre together. The bod} r of attendants show 
 their similarity to a regular chorus by singing the final ode. 
 Schultz 1 believes that, while tragedy had the tetralogic form, 
 this view of Muller is perhaps correct, but that, as soon as 
 plays \vere presented individually, a single chorus of fifteen per- 
 sons acted in turn in each of the plays of a poet. 
 
 Nothing has been handed down to us from antiqui'ty that 
 The chants * s ^ rntlcn assistance in deciding whether the 
 
 in the size" view of Muller is correct ; but it is entirely prob- 
 
 O f the chorus ^^ thatj in the early da} s ()f tragedy* before 
 
 Sophocles introduced his improvements, the poet received a 
 chorus of forty-eight men. The size, of the chorus was origin- 
 ally, as Pollux states, fifty. When the practice was introduced 
 of presenting plays in tetralogies, we may believe that the 
 number was reduced from fifty to forty-eight, thus allowing 
 twelve men for each play. It would have been difficult, if not 
 impossible, in these carry days to secure a set of twelve men so 
 well versed in their art as to be able to successfully perform all 
 
 1 De Chori Trag. Exter., p. 38. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 45 
 
 the dances and songs required in four different plays. In later 
 times, when all parts of the drama had reached a state of per- 
 fect development, it is not unlikely that the art of the choreutae 
 also became so highly developed that a body of fifteen men 
 could be found so well educated in dancing and singing as to be 
 able to perform all the tasks required of them in four different 
 plays, and we may assume that at this time the chorus assigned 
 to a poet was reduced from forty-eight to fifteen. We need not 
 hesitate to believe, then, that, at the time of the presentation 
 of the Oresteia, a single set of fifteen men could have been 
 secured capable of acting as chorus in each of the plays of the 
 tetralogy. 
 
 2 THE POSITION OF THE CHOREUT^ 
 
 When the chorus consisted of persons who were supposed 
 to come from the neighborhood, the entrance 
 
 At its entrance 
 
 was by the western parodos. The chorus, the chorus present- 
 accordingl\% in those cases presented its left side ed its left side 
 
 , -, . r . i ATM r , - rr- to the spectators 
 
 to the view of the spectators. This fact is suffi- 
 ciently illustrated by the scholium to Aris tides r 1 
 
 i>v>~t. r*i '/<>/><> ~; fifUffTSft^ i~zi/<. The military 
 precision with which the chorus was drawn up is shown by the 
 numerous military terms used in connection with the chorus. 
 y^Eschylus frequently uses the word M'/o$ to indicate the chorus; 
 in the Agamemnon, 2 he makes the old men of the chorus to ad- 
 vance against ^Egistheus with hand on sword precisely in the 
 manner of /"/. 
 
 The entrance of the chorus was generally 
 by the western parodos ; but f in a few of the ex- The entrance 
 
 sometimes by the 
 
 tant plays, it was by the eastern parodos. This eastern 
 
 was the case in the Supplices, and the Prome- 
 
 theus of ^Eschylus; in the Philoctetes of Sophocles, and in the 
 
 Phoenissae, the Supplices, the Iphigenia in Aulis, the Bacchae, 
 
 and the Helena of Euripides. 
 
 - TUB 3^. 
 
 1 iii. p. 535 Dind. 2 Agam., 1651. - f(J F I V B R SI T Yj) 
 
46 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The chorus on its entrance was drawn up in one of two 
 ways, as is shown by Pollux, 1 who says : !*./>*) 
 
 The chorus 
 consisted of 
 
 and t'f' >. z. , 
 
 v, e: xara 
 
 There \vere, then, of the tragic chorus of fifteen, five ranks (t>^) 
 of three men each, and three files (<rr^'{) of five men each, and 
 of a comic chorus, six ranks of four men each, and four files of 
 six men each. 
 
 The entrance was said to be *r <r-<'t%<>vs when the members 
 of each stoichus were in line; and xr ^, when 
 
 The entrance called _ -i 
 
 xara (TTt>r/<>v$ the members of each zugon were in line. In a 
 , , r . chorus of twelve members, it follows that the 
 
 stoichus contained but four men instead of five, as 
 in the chorus of fifteen. 
 
 The An entrance xa-a nri-/^n>^ of a chorus of fifteen 
 
 xaTtf ffrofytus members entering the theatre by the western 
 
 parodos presented the following appearance : 
 
 ' . ' r r P a ' i ft 
 
 _!> } ^ Il> -",~rfc 
 
 . \ . \ 
 
 An entrance xara ZVYH of a chorus of fifteen members entering 
 the theatre by the western parodos presented the following 
 appearance : 
 
 1 IV., 108 and 109. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS- OF THE CHORUS 47 
 
 TT' The 
 
 arrangement 
 
 }> 
 
 id. 
 
 jvr f 
 } . \ 
 
 ^, -Co ft^ 
 
 It is evident that the arrangement *ra Trui*/,,^, a narrow 
 and long formation, presented a more pleasing 
 appearance, as the chorus marched in over the The 
 narrow and long parodos, than did the broad 
 and shallow arrangement -/.a-d C'y ; yet we 
 know from Pollux 1 that the -/.a-d ?y arrangement was some- 
 times used. It was not, however, used in any of the extant 
 plays of Sophocles, 2 but Arnold 3 has shown that it was used at 
 the entrance of the chorus in the Frogs of Aristophanes. 
 
 We have no authority of ancient writers to 
 tell us what position the chorus took after ^hechoms 
 
 reaching the orchestra. Hermann 4 believes that after reaching 
 at that time the chorus wheeled completely the orchestra 
 
 around, so that the left file, in which was the coryphaeus, came 
 next to the actors. This was done that the coryphaeus might 
 carry on the conversation with the actors more easily than 
 would have been possible if he had stood on the side of the 
 chorus nearest to the audience. Arnold 5 maintains that t^e 
 personal relations existing between chorus and spectators in 
 comedy compelled the coryphaeus to be as near as possible to 
 the spectators, and that, therefore, the chorus did not wheel 
 about in comedy, but that it did in tragedy. Muller 6 believes 
 that the coryphaeus,stood on the tlrymele, thus securing an ele- 
 vation above that of the remaining choreutae that rendered his 
 
 1 IV., 109. 2 Muff Chor. Tech. des Soph., p. 7. 
 
 3 Die Chorpartien bei Aristophanes, S. 35. 185. 4 Opusc., VI., 2, p. 144 
 
 5 A. a O. S. 187. 6 Eumenides, p. 21. 
 
48 . THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 conversation with the actors easier than would have been pos- 
 sible, if he had been standing on a level with the other choreutae. 
 Muff 1 follows the opinion of Hermann in regard to tragedy, and 
 that of Arnold in regard to comedy, believing that the close 
 relations existing between coryphaeus and actor in tragedy re- 
 quired the former to be in front of, not behind, the other cho- 
 reutae, and that the relations of coryphaeus to spectators as 
 exhibited in the parabasis required him in comedy to be nearer 
 to the spectators. In drawing a conclusion amid the differing 
 opinions, we must be guided by what appears to have been the 
 most probable arrangement. In the first place, it will be ob- 
 served that the ancient authorities say nothing concerning a 
 wheeling around of the chorus after it has reached the orchestra. 
 With all the notices of the manner of entrance, and the arrange- 
 ment of the chorus, it is not probable that, had any such ma- 
 noeuvre taken place, some reference to it would not have been 
 made. Again, the coryphaeus, while standing on the side of the 
 chorus next to the spectators, would have had no difficulty in 
 carrying on the conversation with the actors, for the reason 
 that the actors stood in the orchestra together with the chorus 2 
 and not on an elevated stage, as these writers have assumed. 
 A very serious objection to the belief in the theory that places 
 the left stoichus farthest from the spectators lies in the fact that 
 this stoichus was composed of the best choreutae. At the entrance 
 this file w r as in full view of the spectators, and it seems entirely 
 improbable that, as soon as the parodos was finished, the file 
 containing the most skillful men of the entire chorus was made 
 to take a position w r here it would be less prominently before 
 the eyes of the spectators. 
 
 When the chorus entered by the western parodos, the best 
 
 choreutae were in the left stoichus , and were called 
 
 SSJtaJJfj <>/>.'*r / ^r,3 'men on the left'. The question 
 
 when the chorus arises wrhere these 'men on the left' stood, when 
 
 the chorus came from a distance, and, therefore, 
 
 eastern parodos ' 
 
 entered by the eastern parodos. It is evident 
 that, if they occupied the left file, they were obscured from the 
 
 1 Chor. Tech. des Soph., p. 9. 2 Cf. chap. 3 below. 3 Cf. p. 52 below. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 49 
 
 eyes of the spectators. Schneider 1 believes that this was the 
 case, and that, when the orchestra had been reached, the chorus 
 made a revolution, thus bringing the left file next to the specta- 
 tors. It is, however, unlike^ that this was the case. The 
 'men on the left' were the 'show' men of the chorus. If at any 
 time they were to make a good appearance, it would seem to 
 have been when they were marching in. It is probable, then, 
 that when the chorus entered by the eastern parodos, the 'men 
 on the left' were on the side facing the spectators, and, thus, 
 were, strictly speaking, 'men on the right.' 
 
 During the progress of the dialogue, the chorus generally 
 was stationary. After reaching the orchestra, 
 it turned about to the right, thus changing its O f the chorus dur- 
 
 from '-"-a ffr<>i /ftf ^ tO xr :>y, and, thus, it ing the dialogue 
 " . and the stasima 
 
 faced the actors. During the stasima, as the 
 song was accompanied by dancing, the choreutas evidently 
 were not stationary ; nor is it to be thought that they now 
 faced the actors. As the actors were the chief point of attrac- 
 tion during the dialogue, so the choreutae \vere the center of 
 observation during the singing of the stasima. It is impossible 
 to say exactly what position they took at this time ; we know 
 only that they were not stationary, and we may infer with 
 confidence that they were not facing the actors. 2 
 
 It is probable that, at the close of the play, the chorus left 
 the theatre with the same regularity of move- 
 ment with which it had entered, at the begin- 
 ning of the plav. In a few instances, the chorus at the close 
 
 left the theater during the course of the play,s ^ring^fpu? 
 and returned later. This departure was called 
 rjLSTfiffTfjLffif, and the return i-i-a/HK""?.* I n the Septem of JEschy- 
 lus, at the close of the play, the chorus left in two divisions, 
 one division following the body of Eteocles, the other that of 
 Polynices. 
 
 1 Att. Theaterwessen S. 15ff., 193ff. 2 Haigh A. T., p. 275. 
 
 3 Eumen.. 235; Ajax, 815; Helena, 327ff; Alcest., 746; Eccles, 310. 
 
 4 Pollux IV., 108. 
 
50 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 To aid the choreutae in keeping their positions while stand- 
 ing in the orchestra, Hersychius says: 1 ^//// 
 
 it? the orchestra ^ ~* ( '!'t r i~! >a ''><'-' <* "<''' '/."('^ ^ ff-oiyw IffraffOat. It 
 
 is, however, better to believe with Hermann 2 
 that such lines were not necessary in order that a well trained 
 chorus of fifteen or twenty-four persons might stand in rank 
 and file. It is probable, rather, as Schultze 3 suggests, that lines 
 were drawn in the orchestra to serve as a guide to the choreu- 
 tse in making the various evolutions that occurred, as they 
 were singing the longer choral odes. 
 
 When the chorus separated into semi-choruses, the cory- 
 
 phaeus stood apart, and left the management of 
 lr'f' f ''a'^ "^e semi-choruses to their own leaders. 4 This 
 
 separation into semi-choruses is especially com- 
 mon in comedy, where, in the last part of the parabasis, which 
 Was antistrophical in form, the different parts were given by 
 the two semi-choruses separately. 5 At this time the semi- 
 choruses stood facing each other, as may be inferred from 
 
 orat -apifiauuv , The only separation into semi-choruses in Soph- 
 ocles is the one already mentioned as occurring in the Ajax. 7 A 
 similar division takes place in the Orestes of Euripides, where 
 Electra stations the chorus in two divisions, one at the eastern, 
 the other at the western parodos. 8 Pollux says concerning a 
 
 division of the chorus : xat f, ,'!.'.%? ftmv oz. xa> '.y<>f>:a. -/.a\ vr.'^//jV/. 
 
 a ft'avcafoiow, ^r'.yuj.ia.^ Pollux here makes fa/i'/i'M and r,>tr/ofi'.ov 
 
 to be of the same meaning. Schultze 10 conjectures that the term 
 tit/nfitu should be applied \vhen the half-choruses consisted of 
 persons of different ranks, or ages, or sexes, or when there was 
 some other similar difference betw r een them. He would, there- 
 fore, call the division in the Birds of Aristophanes a '^<r jV/ , for 
 
 I., p. 855. 2 Opusc.. VI., part ii., p. 145sq. 
 
 De Cho. Trag. Ext. Hab., p. 50. 4- Cf. MnffChor. Tech. Soph., p. 13. 
 Haigh A. T.. p. 275. 6 14 p. 131. 7 Muff Chor. Tech. Soph., p. 21f. 
 80Gff. 9 IV., 107. 10 De Ch. Trag. Ext., p. 52. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 51 
 
 there the chorus consisted of twelve masculine and twelve 
 feminine birds. A similar difference existed in the Phoenissae of 
 Phrynichus, where half the chorus consisted of Persian old men, 
 and half of Phoenician old women. There is, however, no evi- 
 dence to prove that the conjecture of Schultze as to the differ- 
 ences between 5j//.7//rv and tit/tipM is correct. The scholiast to 
 Aristophanes' Equites (589) makes a statement of which there 
 is no corroboration and which it is difficult to believe: sVrj ff 
 
 The position of the coryphaeus as the center of the left *rt- 
 ^"s\ in a chorus of fifteen members, is indicated 
 
 . . The position 
 
 by the title of r/fry, or //cV</,>. ;,<>>-t { n t :> that is ap- 
 
 plied to him. PhotiuS SavS : -'r/^5jv=v </wv r,/ //c- in a chorus 
 
 . of fifteen. 
 
 FT/)OJ (7~(>'.'/<' T^V i>7J//0777JV X. T. X.* It IS 
 
 evident that the middle position was occupied by the coryphae- 
 us, and in the title r//j'r^ ('1^-1^ is additional evidence that the 
 usual entrance of the chorus was xr rrr^^c, for it is not prob- 
 able that in a xr/i ^>/-' /: entrance, the position of the coryphaeus 
 was rfit-i'*. The position of the coryphaeus in a *r <r-<ii%<ius for- 
 mation was that indicated by */ ' in the diagram on page 46. 
 In a xtfTtt !>,>;'6c formation of a chorus of fifteen, the position of 
 the coryphaeus was no doubt that indicated by ' ,?' ' in the dia- 
 gram. Here the title />cW is applicable to him, though not the 
 title of -(:-*. 
 
 When a chorus of twelve members \vas drawn up xr OTJ- 
 2'^, the left ff-"i-/"< appeared thus : 
 
 ,}' Y 3 a The position 
 v. v v v. of the coryphaeus 
 
 There is here no p&N* ^*rt^D, and Schultze 2 in o a f c e 
 
 leaves it undecided whether the coryphaeus oc- 
 cupied the position p or /-'. It is probable that Muff is correct 3 
 in claiming his position as ,?', and this because of the relation 
 
 1 S. V. t/>JTf aptffTepOU. 2 De Ch. Trag. Ext., p. 44. 
 3 Chor. Tech. des Soph., p. 13. 
 
52 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 existing between the coryphaeus and his two -<j.<><i.r>-<'i~<i.'.. Aris- 
 totle 1 likens the relation that existed between coryphaeus and 
 parastates to that existing between man and slave, or even to 
 that existing between man and wife. He, also, calls the one of 
 these parastatai that was of inferior rank -pi-ntT^i-r^v These 
 men doubtless stood one in front of, the other in the rear of, the 
 coryphaeus, when the chorus marched in, taking the positions 
 /3' and ff in a z7 n-oi'/jio^ formation of a chorus of fifteen. Their 
 duties were to assist the coryphaeus, and, at a division of the 
 chorus, to act as leaders of the two semi-choruses. In a chorus 
 of twelve men, Muff believes that there was but one parastates, 
 and that, at a division of the chorus, the coryphaeus acted 
 as leader of one semi-chorus, the parastates as leader of the 
 other. As the rank of the coryphaeus was higher than that 
 of the parastates, it was the duty of the former to set the ex- 
 ample for the latter to follow. This could be done more easily 
 if the parastates was behind the coryphaeus, and, accordingly, 
 as the chorus of twelve members drawn up x7 wttytu<$ marched 
 in, the position of the coryphaeus was, doubtless, that indicated 
 by p, that of his parastates, the position indicated by / , on the 
 diagram given on the preceding page. 
 
 3 THE NAMES OF THE CHOREUTVE 
 
 The five choreutae in the left file, as the chorus of fifteen 
 
 marched in by the western parodos, were called 
 
 Their names fJLptffTspnffT<iTat.Qt'KpuiT<KrT(Ta.i& The five in the right 
 
 derived from 
 
 their positions file were called dtSiuffrarai or T/HToffrabat. The five 
 
 in the middle file were called /u///r77, 'men in 
 
 the lane,' or dsurspnardrai.^ Those in the middle file were called 
 
 also n~o'/.('t^~ '.'.', h<>7.u A '.<>v ~o~> y^ninr,' T/^ ffTfi<TSQ)$ yotjitj.'. a! Q,TlfWi f & 
 
 The men at the ends (, ?', , t, t, *) are called fusts by Suidas : 
 s- 1 (ixpiKj %<>(><>>) ^7//vv; 6 and by Hesychius: <>l ?>ffra-<n ^//y^W/ritc ;? 
 and they are called xpwzsiii-fju by Plutarch : Cun-sp %<tpov, -<> : ) <<>.- 
 
 <>fT'j>O To's XpOLffltsdlTljV TW 7.nt)lf(l.>.M <7t)';'f' t '/.Oil's e%1l'sTO$-,& 
 
 1 Polit., III., 4. 2 Metaph., IV., 11 3 Cf. diagram p. 46 above. 
 
 4 Poll., ii., 161 ; iv., 108. Phot. v. AafJfHHtTfira'. J Hesych. v. a/tlffTSfHMTrdrqf. 
 
 5 Hesych., II., p. 1471. 6 v. fl/.elf. 7 v. f'.As:*?. 8 Conv., p. 678D. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 53 
 
 The coryphaeus had several titles. Thus, he was called r/n- 
 T9, !f.ff"$ uftttr-sftw), as has been pointed out. He 
 was called also />/,>> rt& //,, >/"" x ,, f ,w,, &i,,- oftlM J e p |^ 
 '/, and s^w'S", 1 as well as x//up'. 2 Sommer- 
 brodt thinks that the titles ~/<>i><>/^-/.r-r^ and /"/ y "~ '^ a Pply to the 
 coryphaeus. 3 It is, however, better to believe with Schultze, 4 
 and with Muff, 5 that these titles refer rather to the trainer. 
 The cor\rphaeus was called also y<>ixr-d-r^Q This word signifies, 
 etyniologically, one that arranges the chorus, and, therefore, 
 is not strictly applicable to the coryphaeus. The \vord is prob- 
 ably a survival from early days. Schultze 7 believes that after 
 the ?>-<nWuTx.a).tK$ was appointed to aid the poet in training the 
 chorus, for a time he assumed some of the duties of the cory- 
 phaeus, that he was called zofHHr-d-ys from his functions of >>-<>- 
 f7."57x/9, and that the title y^innrrd-r^ came afterwards to 
 be applied to the coryphaeus, when his duties were not per- 
 formed by the bxdt8dtfzaA?. 
 
 A passage in Athenaeus shows that the choregus also in 
 early days performed the duties of the coryphae- 
 
 us : ixd/j>u\> <H xv.} '/(i(ir,Y<ins any i!)f)-zn v"-v ro'V n.'.nOat)- 
 
 as coryphaeus 
 
 In the earliest times, the poets themselves trained their 
 choruses. Thespis, Pratinas, Cratinas and 
 
 . The poet as trainer, 
 
 Phrymchus are said by Athenaeus 9 to have ex- 
 
 celled in training choruses. The choregus was e 7rca 
 
 . ' , as coryphaeus. 
 
 in these early times also coryphaeus, as is proved 
 by the passage just quoted from Athenaeus, and also by Suidas, 
 who speaks of the choregus as : y,"(>w* '' 7 " ; 7."l" >:> ^Y'"'^'-^"^ xa ^ 1 
 fiit-yfi. When the professional, trainer was appointed to aid the 
 poet in training the chorus, the latter still exercised a supervi- 
 sion over the work, as is shown by the words of Photius : 10 '>-<>- 
 
 The choregus, it may be assumed, abandoned his duty 
 
 1 Cf. Muff Chor. Tech. des Soph., p. 7f. 2 Schol. Arist., Plut., 953, 954. 
 
 3 S. 13ff. 4 De Chor. Trag. Ext., p. 47. 5 Chor. Tech. p. 8. 
 
 6 Himerius Orat., IX.. 3. 7 De Chor. Trag., p. 48. 8 XIV., 633b. 
 
 9 I. 22. 10 p. 627, 10. 
 
54 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 of acting as coryphaeus, when the &^&&*f*rt#? was appointed, 
 and subsequently the latter also abandoned the task of cory- 
 phaeus, devoting his time entirely to the training of the chorus, 
 and leaving the functions of the coryphaeus to be performed by 
 that person himself. 
 
 The choreutae in the left file, inasmuch as they were in the 
 most conspicuous position, one could believe to 
 have been the best looking and most skillful 
 
 varied men in the chorus, even if special mention of this 
 
 in different files * . 
 
 fact were not made by ancient writers. 1 The 
 choreutae in the third file came next in point of skill. If at any 
 time the chorus wheeled completely around, these men came di- 
 rectly before the audience, and so it was necessary that they be 
 inferior only to the choreutae in the first file. Those in the sec- 
 ond file were the poorest. They were the least exposed to the 
 eyes of both actors and spectators. This fact is sufficiently 
 shown by Photius : 2 >>.inov mo %<>(> -V 
 M-sfnn ds obmt, and by Hesychius: 3 
 
 4 A SECONDARY CHORUS 
 
 Whatever the choregus provided besides the regular chorus 
 
 was called -/y;^y'OT/'-. This might include per- 
 
 nt (! Z U F9FW**. sons w ho appeared as mute characters, or per- 
 
 zajifJLffxrpuiv . -j > j 1 j 
 
 sons who said a ie\\r words only, or a secondary 
 chorus. If it was necessary for words to be either sung or 
 spoken by persons out of sight of the spectators, these persons 
 were called -a//ffx^'v. In some cases, these persons could be 
 either members of the regular chorus or actors. At other times, 
 such could not be the case, and then they came under the head 
 of ~ ( i-(>^>t>f'cpti l -"-i and, as the derivation of the word indicates, 
 they were supplied by the choregus. 4 
 
 1 Cf. Schol. Aristides, quoted p. 45 above. 
 3 II., p. 434. 4 Cf. Haigh A. T., p. 212f. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 55 
 
 There are five passages in which the word "/'/"/'ij'/'y/'. oc- 
 curs. Four of them are scholia ; the other is a 
 passage in Pollux. 1 The first and second of the Passages where 
 
 t 1 . r -, occurs the word 
 
 scholia refer to mute persons as parachoregema, -^o^o/,/;^//^/. 
 the tnird designates a secondary chorus by this 
 title, and the fourth applies the word to persons who say a few 
 words. The passage in Pollux says that whenever a choreutes 
 sings in place of a fourth actor, he is called -///rxTjvr/>, but that 
 when he speaks he is called -//^o/^'/r / //.. This statement does 
 not agree with the statements of the scholia, and is, doubtless, 
 an error on the part of Pollux. The inaccuracy of the passage 
 in Pollux is still further shown by the statement in it concern- 
 ing a -aiw/.r^in; in the Agamemnon, while in that play no para- 
 skenion exists. 
 
 As instances of paraskenia in comedy, may be mentioned 
 the chorus of frosrs in the Frogs, and the chorus 
 
 Examples of 
 
 of Agathon in the Thesmophonazusae. 2 Ihe - 
 
 regular choruses in these tv. o plavs had not vet and of 
 
 -ii.iKi.'/ixrf.Y'r. 'i.i/- a 
 
 appeared, and so, doubtless, they took the parts 
 of these special choruses. But an additional chorus was need- 
 ed in the Wasps, 3 where the chorus of boys appeared at the 
 same time as the regular chorus; and, in the Lysistrata, four 
 choruses appear at the same time. In tragedy, in the Hyppo- 
 lytus, 4 the chorus of huntsmen after singing an ode to Artemis 
 march out, and the chorus of women, the regular chorus of the 
 play, at once appear. In the Eumenides, an additional chorus 
 is present during a great part of the play. In these two ex- 
 amples from tragedy, then, as well as in the Wasps and the Ly- 
 sistrata from comedy, we have examples of choruses coming 
 under the definition of parachoregema. 
 
 5 THE CHOREGUS. 
 
 As a part of the Dionysiac entertainments, were the con- 
 tests between dithyrambic choruses. There 
 were five choruses composed of boys, and five 
 composed of men. Each of the ten tribes of 
 
 1 Scholia to Prom., 12; Eumen., 573; Fro^s, 2O9 ; Pax, 114; Poll., IV., 109. 
 
 2 Ran., 209; Thesm., 104. 3 Vesp., 248. 4 Hipp., 61. 
 
56 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 Athens was represented by one of these ten choruses. The vic- 
 tory of the chorus was considered a victory for the tribe. 
 With these dithyrambic contests, we have nothing here to do. 
 The dramatic contests, though the\ r were under the supervision 
 of the State, w r ere contests between individuals. The poet, the 
 choregus, the chorus \vere taken from Athens at large, and not 
 from any particular tribe. In early times, the contests included 
 only poets and choregi; afterwards actors also were included in 
 the contests. The success or failure of a play was due in great 
 measure to the manner in which the choregus performed his 
 duties. The poets were appointed by the archon ; the plays 
 were submitted to him and it was his judgement that deter- 
 mined what plays had sufficient merit to warrant their presen- 
 tation at the Dionysiac festival. The choregus also was 
 appointed by the archon. 1 The succession of the office of cho- 
 regus was determined by law; each wealthy citizen was required 
 in his turn to take this duty ; but an unusually public-spirited 
 man could take this office oftener than the law required, if 
 he so desired. In a speech of Lysias, 2 the defendant states 
 that he has been choregus to eight choruses in nine years. This 
 duty was liable to be given to a citizen as soon as he had reached 
 his twentieth year, though a choregus to a chorus of bo} r s must 
 have reached his fortieth year. 3 The manner in which choregi 
 and poets were brought together has not been handed down 
 us by the ancient authorities. We know only that the archon 
 selected them. Demosthenes 4 describes the manner in which, in 
 the dithyrambic contests, the flute-players were assigned to the 
 choregi by lot, and from this it may be assumed as not unlike- 
 ly that a similar manner was adopted in assigning the poets to 
 to the choregi. The importance to the contending poet that he 
 have a liberal choregus, as well as the importance to the chore- 
 gus that he be associated with a talented poet, made it neces- 
 sary that choregus and poet be brought together in some way 
 that avoided all appearance of partiality ; and this could have 
 been done in no way better than by assigning to the choregi, 
 the poets by lot. 
 
 1 Demos. Aleid., 13. 2 Orat XXI., 1-5. 3 .-Eschin. Timareh., 11, 12. 
 4 Meid., 13, 14. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 57 
 
 After actor, poet and choregus had been brought together, 
 it remained for these three persons to prepare 
 the play for presentation. The choregus had, in 
 general, nothing to do with the actors, nor did 
 he train the chorus. His main duties were to select the mem- 
 bers of the chorus, care for them during their term of training, 
 and pay them for their services. He had, also, at times to pro- 
 vide a few accessories of the play. He provided a room in 
 which they were to practice 1 , which was called '5."Wxtt/i?v,2 or 
 /<t(rtfz'.t.3 More is known concerning the relations existing 
 between the dithyrambic choregus and his chorus than con- 
 cerning the similar relations in the dramatic performances. In 
 the former instance, it is related of the choregus in Antiphon's 
 speech that he lodged his chorus of boys in his own house dur- 
 ing the entire term of training. This could hardly have been 
 done in case of a dramatic chorus. Here the chorus consisted 
 of persons drawn from the whole State, and Aristotle remarks 4 
 that a tragic and a comic chorus often consisted of the same 
 persons. It may, therefore, be inferred that a class of profes- 
 sional singers arose, and that they were often at the same time 
 under engagement by more than one choregus. There is, how- 
 ever, no doubt that the choregus attended to the personal 
 \vants of his chorus during the time of their engagement. Plu- 
 tarch mentions certain delicacies of diet that the choregus 
 provided for his chorus. 5 
 
 The chief expense that the choregus had to bear was the 
 hire of the chorus during the entire term of train- 
 ing. After the custom had become established oi ^c^c^l 
 of having an instructor apart from the poet, the 
 choregus paid for his services. Whether the choregus paid for 
 the services of the flute-player cannot be stated with certaint}^. 
 He had, also, to pay for the dresses of the choreutae, and there 
 was here ample opportunity for indulging an extravagant 
 taste. Demosthenes 6 supplied his chorus of men with crowns 
 of gold. It is, however, related that choregi sometimes went 
 
 1 Xen. Hiero, IX., 4. 2 Antipbon Orat., VI., 11. 3 Bekk. Anecd., p. 72, 17. 
 4 Pol., Ill,, 3. 5 Glov. Athen., 349 B. 6 Demos. Meid., 16. 
 
58 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 to the opposite extreme, and supplied their choruses with sec- 
 ond-hand dresses. 1 The choregus had to supply, also, those 
 various persons coming under the head of -a/m^o/^y^/jia,^ an d ^ o 
 pay for the dresses of such persons. That the choregus supplied 
 these extra persons is proved by the story related by Plutarch 3 
 of a tragic actor who was to take the part of a queen, but 
 refused to do so, unless the choregus supplied him withanumer- 
 ous band of attendants. The scenery was generally the prop- 
 erty of the theatre, but if any special kind of scenery was 
 needed, it is probable that the choregus had to pay for it. A 
 choregus who was inclined to be liberal could easily spend a 
 large sum of money in fulfilling the duties of his office, and it 
 was especially easy to do so because of the intense rivalry that 
 existed between different choregi. Demosthenes 4 saysthatmen 
 often spent all their money in equipping choruses, and 5 that 
 more money was spent upon the festivals than upon a naval ex- 
 pedition. The defendant in a speech of Lysias 6 states that he 
 spent upon a tragic chorus thirty minae, upon a comic chorus 
 sixteen minae, and upon a chorus of boys fifteen minae, while a 
 chorus of men cost him fifty minae. Lysias tells, 7 also, of a cer- 
 tain man who spent fifty minae upon two tragic choruses. 
 
 The successful choregus in a dithyrambic contest received 
 Minor details from the State a tripod, which he erected in 
 concerning some prominent place upon a monument upon 
 
 which his victory was recorded.* The success- 
 ful choregus in a dramatic contest received no such prize, but, 
 at the close of the contest, after the victory had been pro- 
 claimed by the herald, both the victorious poet and his choregus 
 were crowned with garlands of ivy by the archon, in the pres- 
 ence of the spectators 9 . It was customary, also, for the chore- 
 gus to erect a monument commemorating his victory. On the 
 monument was inscribed merely the names of the poet, the 
 choregus, and the archon for the year. In the procession that 
 took place 011 the first day of the festival, the choregus appeared. 
 Demosthenes says 10 that when he was choregus, he wore a 
 
 1 Poll., VII., 78. 2 Cf. p. 54 above. 3 Phocion, Ch. XIX. 4 Meid., 61 
 
 5 Phillip, I., 35. 6 Orat., XXI., 1-5. 7 Oral. XIX., 29, 42. 
 
 8 Demosth. Meid., 5; Lysias, Orat. XXI., 2. 9 Aristid., vol. ii., p. 2 Dindf. 
 
 10 Meid., 10. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 59 
 
 crown and a mantle that had been made especially to wear on 
 that occasion. At the Proagon, appeared together with the 
 poets and actors also the choregi. All of these persons wore 
 crowns, but did not wear masks or stage-dresses. At the ban- 
 quet given by the successful poet, there were present many of 
 his friends, and it is entirely likely that the choregus was 
 included among the guests, though there is no definite inform- 
 ation to that effect. The persons of the participants at the 
 Dionysiac festivals were regarded as sacred. Poets, actors, 
 chorus, choregi were all considered as servants of the god 
 Dionysus, and an offense against any one of these was an 
 offense against the god himself. Demosthenes who, as chore- 
 gus, was struck by Meidias, considered that not only he but 
 the whole city of Athens had been insulted. The greatest 
 statesmen were proud of winning victories as choregi, yet it 
 seems that at times the choregus was too economical, or 
 neglected his duties, and in such cases, it was the part of the 
 archon to urge him to the proper fulfillment of his task. 1 
 
 In the year 406 B. C., a law was passed at Athens provid- 
 ing that each dramatic chorus at the City 
 Dionysia should have two choregi.2 This reduc- 
 tion of expenses to the individual was necessitat- 
 ed by the cramped financial condition of the citizens caused by the 
 Peloponnesian war. Desmosthenes relates 2 that in his time 
 the tribe of Pandionis for two years was unable to supply a 
 choregus for a dithyrambic chorus. The law of 406 may sub- 
 sequently have been repealed, for single individuals are again 
 found as choregi to tragic choruses. 3 At about the beginning 
 of the third century, the choregia was abolished, and an officer 
 called f^ca^tiOlrr^ was appointed by the State, 4 whose duty it 
 was to provide all the choruses, the expenses being borne by the 
 State. He would have to do mostly with dithyrambic choruses, 
 as at this time the chorus had practically disappeared from 
 comedy, and it is probable that the chorus of tragedy was not 
 retained with its former splendor. 
 
 1 Xen. Hiero. IX.. 4. 2 Demos. Meid., 13. 
 
 3 Lysias. Oral., XIX.. 29, 42; Demos. Meid., 156. 
 
 4 Corp. Inscr. Gr., 225, 226; Corp. Inscr. Att., II., 302, 307, 314, 331. 
 
60 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 6 THE DELIVERY OF THE CHORAL PARTS. 
 
 The words of the chorus were delivered sometimes in song, 
 sometimes in recitative, and sometimes in ordi- 
 Theparodot nary speech. At times they were delivered by 
 
 the whole chorus, at other times by parts of the 
 chorus, and, again, at times by individual choreutae. In the 
 parodos, the whole chorus generally took part. Aristotle's 
 definition of the parodos is : -f/[><>do$ >i.kv i t -/to)-^ /U'r^ o/u 
 /ofol'L ; and, apart from any evidence of ancient writers, it 
 is easily seen that the first appearance of the chorus would be 
 rendered more effective in the sight of the spectators, if all the 
 members joined in the opening song. The difference between 
 the parodos and the stasimon consisted in this, that the 
 former was sung as the chorus was approaching the orches- 
 tra, the latter was sung by the chorus while it was in the 
 orchestra; and, again, that the parodos commonly explained 
 the presence of the chorus and its sympathy with the action of 
 the play, the stasimon expressed the sympathy of the chorus 
 as it had been developed by the course of the play. In some 
 instances, the opening song of the chorus was not sung by the 
 whole chorus. The chorus in the Alcestis of Euripides at its 
 entrance is divided into two half-choruses, which sing alter- 
 nately. The Scholium to Alcestis (79) says: * ys/x'^-o^ vz<><uu 
 c> /<'('>?. u'.aifisirai ds ei$ o>>t> r t >).'.-//> t.a. In the Ion, the parodos is 
 sung by parts of the chorus. In the Frogs of Aristophanes, in 
 the middle of the parodos 2 occurs a set of anapaests which 
 were spoken by the coryphaeus, as may be inferred from the 
 concluding words: {>!i.zis $ ^^Y-'-!'"~ <>.>-^ *. r. /., in which the 
 chorus is ordered to proceed with the song. In the CEdipus 
 Coloneus of Sophocles, Muff 3 believes that the parodos was 
 sung by individual members of the chorus ; and the same 
 was no doubt the casein the first part of the Eumenides of 
 ^Eschylus where the words: ^"/"^ <*W''^ 4 indicate that the 
 chorus has reached its regular position in the orchestra. The 
 remaining part of the parodos was, doubtless, sung by the 
 whole chorus. In some of the older tradgedians, the parodos 
 
 1 roef., c. 12. 2 Vs. 354-371. 3 Chor. Tech., p. 16. 4 V. 307. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 6i 
 
 begins with a series of anapaests. In these parodi, as, e. g. in 
 those of the Supplices and the Persae, Richter 1 infers that the 
 anapaests were recited by the coryphaeus, and that the whole 
 chorus began only where the anapaests ceased, but it is impos- 
 sible to prove that such was the case, and the conclusion re- 
 mains that, except in a few instances, the parodos was recited 
 by the whole chorus. 
 
 Aristotle states that the stasima, as well as the parodos, 
 belonged to the whole chorus : %o/>ixo> : -/.a} -oo-oo 
 
 TO /J.sv icdpodo$ TO dz ffrdfftfJLOV. '/.o'.va <>.kv </.d';Tcv; TU^TO. The stasima 
 
 /.. T. /.2 As the parodos occurred at the opening 
 of the play, so the stasima occurred, as the derivation of the 
 word indicates, while the chorus was standingin the orchestra. 
 Aristotle says 2 that the stasima should contain neither ana- 
 paests nor trochees, tv.o metres that, on account of their march- 
 ing rhythm, are suited to the parodos, but not to the stasima. 
 The stasima divide tragedy into parts that correspond to what 
 in modern plays are called 'acts.' Horace 3 asserts that the 
 play should have neither fewer or more than five acts, but this 
 rule is not observed by the tragedians. Thus, the Philoctetes 
 has but one stasimon, and so has three acts, counting the pro- 
 logue as one act; while the Antigone has seven stasima, and so 
 has more than five acts. Stasima are introduced when the ac- 
 tion of the play has reached a point that necessitates the reflec- 
 tions upon the conditions of affairs by the chorus. In the 
 Agamemnon, the stasimon ending with verse 1033 is the last 
 one, the remaining 641 verses constituting the last act. The 
 prophecies contained in tnis stasimon so closely coincide with 
 their fulfillment by the death of Agamemnon, and the emotions 
 they excite are so little tranquilizing that there is no opportun- 
 ity for another stasimon. Likewise, in the CEdipus Coloneus, 
 the first general song of the chorus (i. e. the parodos) does not 
 occur until verse 668, before this time the chorus being too full 
 of horror at the fate of CEdipus to sufficiently compose itself to 
 sing a long song discerning the hand of an overruling power. 4 
 
 1 Die Altgriech. Trag., p. 11. 2 Poet., c. 12. 
 
 3 Ars Poet., 189f.: Neve minor, neu sit quinto preductior actu | Fabula, e>tc. 
 
 4 Muller, Lit. Gr.. vol. 1, p. 413. 
 
62 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 It is, doubtless, safe to follow the authority of Aristotle, and 
 assign the stasima to the whole chorus. It is not probable 
 that the effect of these important songs would be lessened by 
 having them sung by parts of the chorus ; yet it is sometimes 
 suggested that such was the case. Thus Richter 1 believes that 
 the strophe was sung by one semi-chorus, the antistrophe by 
 the other, and the epode by the whole chorus, but epodes are 
 rare, and there is not the least evidence that the stasima were 
 thus sung. 
 
 There is a third kind of song in which the whole chorus 
 shorter songs took part. This includes those shorter songs 
 by the whole which come, not like the stasima at pauses in 
 
 the action, but during the course of the dia- 
 logue. They are expressly distinguished from the stasima by 
 the scholium to Sophocles' Trachiniae (216) : ro ?</.{> fjLehddfHov <">/. 
 sfTTt ffTfifftfjutVj //' b-xo Tjj? rfiim,* (>f>%owTat. They are frequently used 
 to express strong but transitory emotions, and, as such, are 
 designated as hyporchemes. They were united with dances 
 more animated than the ordinary tragic dance (^ae/t'.)2 
 
 The choral parts thus far considered are those in which, in 
 general, many voices take part. There are 
 man J instances in which the parts assigned to 
 the chorus were not taken by the chorus as a 
 whole, but either by its leader, or by individual choreutae. 
 When the chorus, in the course of the dialogue, carried on a 
 conversation with the actors, it is reasonable to believe, though 
 there is no direct evidence to prove it, that the coryphaeus 
 acted as spokesman of the chorus. The chorus at these times 
 is but an actor. Other instances are mentioned by Haigh 3 in 
 which it is probable that the coryphaeus spoke for the chorus. 
 These are the anapaests at the ends of choral songs in tragedy 
 by which the approach of an actor is announced, and which, if 
 delivered in recitative, would form a gentle transition between 
 the song that just precedes, and the speech that follows; the 
 anapaests with which many Greek plays end ; the anapaestic 
 
 1 Die Altgriech. Trag., p. 13. 
 
 2 '^Es. Sup., 418-437; Trachin., 205-225; Ajax, 693-717, furnish examples of this 
 kind of song. 3 Att. Th., p. 279. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 63 
 
 tetrameters in comedy, including the speech to the people at the 
 beginning of the parabasis ; speeches like the one in the Frogs j 1 
 and words of exhortation, or remonstrance, that were at times 
 addressed to the rest of the chorus. 2 In these instances we 
 may reasonably believe that the coryphaeus alone spoke. 
 
 There are other instances, in which there is much doubt as 
 to the mode of delivery. Aristotle says: ?< de 
 
 -a a~<j --/^ f>-/:f^-7^ xa>. -/M;I.IJ.<H. /.. r. X. 3 Whether 'lota Commoi 
 
 is to be understood as referring to individuals, 
 or to groups, may be a question of doubt, yet it is evident that 
 the authority of Aristotle assigns the commoi to persons other 
 than the whole chorus. Thecommos is a favorite with ^Eschy- 
 lus more than with the other tragedians. In the Persae, it 
 forms the entire exodus. 4 Beyond the statement of Aristotle, 
 that the whole chorus did not take part in the commos, we 
 have no information on the subject. 
 
 There are still other instances in which it is impossible to 
 determine the methods of delivery. These are 
 
 . . . ., The delivery 
 
 instances in which the chorus is agitated by of the words 
 
 violent emotions, and in which various state- in certain doubt- 
 
 -, . . ful instances 
 
 ments are expressed, often contradicting or re- 
 peating what has already been said. Muller 5 cites certain in- 
 stances in which he recognizes the voices of choreutae speaking 
 individually, and this opinion is shared by Muff. 6 The scholium 
 to the Septem (97) bears upon this question : -wna di -us<$ -u 
 -<>>) %<>;, <><> yu-sa'./.wv -on* rc Irloa^ cr^.'V. Our information on the 
 subject, however, is so limited that it may be \vell to leave it 
 undecided how the choral parts in such cases were sung ; yet in 
 two instances it seems easy to distinguish the voices of indi- 
 vidual choreutae. These are the words spoken by the Erinyes 
 in the Eumenides 7 at their first appearance ; and the words of 
 the choreutae in the Agamemnon 8 at the time of the murder of 
 the king. 
 
 1 Cf. p. 60 above. 2 e. g., Ran., 382; Vesp., 1516. 3 Poet., ch. 12. 
 4 907-1O76. 5 Lit. Gr., vol. 1, p. 414. Instances cited are : Eumen., 140-177, 
 254-275. 777-792, 836-846; theb., 78-181; Sup.. 1019-1074. 
 6 Chor. Tech. des Soph., p. 15sq. 7 140ff. 8 1344ff. 
 
64 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 In comedy the parodoi are never so long as in tragedy, nor 
 are they so complicated in structure. The sta- 
 The parabasis sima, also, are not so long, nor do they, like the 
 tragic stasima, serve to elevate the minds of the 
 spectators to a calm consideration of the action of the play. 
 This deficiency in stasimon is compensated for by an element 
 peculiar to comedy, the parabasis. Like the stasimon, it was 
 introduced at a pause in the action, and in Aristophanes the 
 favorite place for it is at the point in the play where a crisis 
 seems inevitable. The complete parabasis consisted of three 
 parts. The first part is that in which the chorus, which up to 
 that point had been facing the proscenium, turned about, and 
 advanced toward the spectators. This is the parabasis proper. 
 It usually consisted of anapaestic tetrameters, at times mixed 
 with other long verses. It began with a short opening song 
 called xop/jidTtov, and ended with a long anapaestic system called 
 xv~iYs, or fjMxpov. In this, the parabasis proper, the poet spoke 
 of his own aifairs, extolled his own merits and derided his rivals, 
 the second part of the parabasis was a lyric song addressed to 
 some one of the gods. Following this came the third part, the 
 iKippr)iJ.a, which was in trochaic verses of which there should 
 regularly be sixteen, which contained some reproach against 
 the city, or some complaint, and which was in some way con- 
 nected with the subject of the play. Both the lyric song and 
 the iirtfifypa were repeated antistrophically. There is in comedy 
 a license in all its parts, and this is seen in the parabasis, which 
 in some plays is divided into two parts, the anapaestical intro- 
 duction being separated from the lyrical song, as in the Peace, 
 the Frogs and the Knights. In the Knights, there is even a 
 second parabasis, but without the anapaestical introduction ; 
 and in the Lysistrata, the Plutus, and the Ecclesiazusae 
 the parabasis is omitted. 1 
 
 1 Muller Lit. Gr., vol. ii., p. 13sq. Schol. Aristoph. Equit., 503. 
 
THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 65 
 
 7 THE COSTUME OF THE CHOREUT^ 
 
 The choreutae were dressed nearly like persons in ordinary 
 life. As only men took the parts either of ac- The costume 
 
 tors or of choreutae, it was necessary that masks of the choreutae 
 be used in the latter instance, as in the former. 1 
 A kind of shoe, x/^rtV, is said to have been invented by Sopho- 
 cles for the use of the chorus. 2 The dress was at times varied 
 to suit the circumstances of individual plays. Thus, the chorus 
 of suppliant women in the Supplices of Euripides wore black 
 garments : xoupa} fts -/.al TcTr/w/^ar' on Oswpixd^ and carried in their 
 hands branches, as a sign of supplication : Ixrijpt OaM& Kpoffmr- 
 vou<? ifwv yoov^ and the chorus of maidens in the Choephori 
 were dressed in black : T& -<>(f fyT onrfrupts \ trrefyst yuvatx&v ydpsfftv 
 fjLSAarztfwt?.* In the Supplices of ^schylus, the daughters of 
 Danaus were evidently dressed in foreign garb : llodaxov Spdov 
 TovtJ 1 aveJUii]v6<fToJLov I ~l~A<>t(Ti fiapffdpotfft xa} JtuxvwfjLCttft %JitQVTat,.& The 
 old men in the chorus of the Agamemnon carried staffs : vxr;-- 
 rpots IfTo-atoa 'slfjursres -6 and thesame fact occurred in the Hercules 
 Furens : a/j^t fidxrpms epsta/M Olij.evo<s.t The chorus in the Bac- 
 chas carried tambourines in their hands : afpetrfte rd-r/^wpC sv rrwAej 
 (fpnywv | Tu/jLxava.8 The chorus of the Eumenides was of an excep- 
 tional character: ii-i^at^at <Y &? ro -av fide&uxrpitot t Q and the terror 
 caused to the spectators by the appearance of such an unusual 
 chorus is mentioned by Pollux. 10 
 
 While in the old comedy the dress of the choreutae was, in 
 general, that of ordinary life, there were still The costume 
 
 greater variations from that type than there ofthechoreut^ 
 were in tragedy. Aristophanes, in the Clouds, 11 
 claims credit for having, in that play, laid aside not only the 
 comic dance (xopda*), but also various indecencies of costume. 
 The dance in comedy was always wild, as compared with the 
 dignified and stately dance of tragedy (^e/t'a), and to allow 
 the freedom of movement needed for this dance the mantle was 
 
 laid aside: A/' a-oomrss TO?? dvaxatffrots imtafJLSV^ T&V (f IpLCtTtatv r- 
 
 1 Pausanias, I., 28. 6. 2 Vit. Soph. 3 Eurip. Sup., 97 ; 1O. 
 
 4 Chceph., lOf. 5 ^Es. Sup., 234ff. 6 Agam., 75. 7 Here. Fur., 108f. 
 
 8 Bacchje, 58f. 9 Eumen., 52. 10 Poll., IV., 110. 11 537ff. 
 
 12 Aristoph. Acharn., 627. 
 
66 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The masks, as befitted comedy, were of a ludicrous de- 
 sign. 2 In many of the pla} r s of the comic poets, the chorus rep- 
 resented animals, as in the Birds and the Wasps of Aristoph- 
 anes, and in similar plays of Eupolis and Magnes. The only in- 
 formation that we have concerning the costume in these cho- 
 ruses is derived from vase-paintings, which indicate that the 
 resemblance of the choreutae to the animals was of but a very 
 general character. A still different kind of play was the Clouds 
 of Aristophanes, the Seasons of Cratinus, and the Towns and 
 Cities of Eupolis. Concerning the first of these plays we know 
 from two scholia to the Clouds that the only resemblance to 
 clouds lay in the bright color of the dresses, and that in the 
 masks there were various ludicrous devices. The first scholium 
 is to verse 289 : p.OJ^i 8i rd$ Neylla? yuvatxofjtopjpou? eiffdysw, iffO^n 
 Ttotzt/.'fl jfptvfjL^va, 1 ?) JW Tfl roiv obpctviwv (poXdmofn ffyyjij.ara. The second 
 scholium is to verse 344: efaehqMffatrt ydp ol rb$ %opou xpoffwneta, 
 
 The costume of the satyrs in a satiric drama is 
 The costume sufficiently illustrated on vase paintings. It 
 
 ofthechoreutae . J ' . 
 
 in the satyr-drama consisted of merely a goat-skin around the loins 
 with a tail hanging down behind and the 
 phallus. 3 
 
 1 Aristoph. Thesmoph., 656. 2 Schol. Clouds, 344. 3 Haigh Att. Th., p. 265. 
 
CHAPTER III 
 THE STAGE 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 1 Alleged Evidence in Favor of the Stage : 
 
 The statements of Vitruvius and PolTttx concerning the Greek 
 
 stage. 
 
 Five passages from Aristophanes claimed as evidence of a stage. 
 The scholium on the Knights. 
 The explanation of Suidas. 
 The interpretation of the two scholia. 
 dvaftatVSlV in the passage from the Knights has really no 
 
 force. 
 
 /.(/.Tafiai'ssi's in the fourth passage is used metaphorically. 
 fZVa-XaTCt-ficUVetV in other -writers. 
 The commands in the five passages are to actors who have 
 
 just entered. 
 
 The five passages furnish no evidence of a stage. 
 A passage in the Birds claimed to supply evidence of a stage. 
 A passage in the Lvsistrata claimed to supply evidence of a 
 
 stage. 
 A passage in the Supplices (^Es.) claimed to supply evidence of 
 
 a stage. 
 
 A passage in the Peace claimed to supply evidence of a stage. 
 Passages in which it is claimed that the chorus withdrew close 
 to the wall of the stage: 
 
 (1) Choephori, 872ff. 
 
 (2) Hercules Furens, 1081ff. 
 
 (3) Ecclesiazusa?, 496ff. 
 
 (4) Acharnians, 239f. 
 
 The entrance of the chorus into the palace prevented. 
 
 The passage in Plato's Symposium. 
 
 The stone border would not have interfered with free action. 
 
 No difficulty in distinguishing actors from chorus, if all were in 
 
 the orchestra together. 
 Need of a shallow stage claimed. 
 
 2 The Thymele: 
 
 The difficulties presented by a high stage avoided by assuming 
 
 a platform for the chorus. 
 A passage quoted by Wieseler and Hermann as evidence of a 
 
 platform. 
 
 The arguments drawn from this passage. 
 
 Passages quoted by Muller as showing evidence of a platform. 
 None of these passages supply evidence of a platform. 
 Positive evidence against the existence of a platform : 
 
 (1) It would have interfered with the dithyrambic con- 
 
 tests. 
 
 (2) No traces of such a platform remain. 
 
 (3) The circle on the floor of the orchestra at Epidaurus. 
 
 SJTIVBRSITY 
 
68 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 2 TheThymele: (Concluded.) 
 
 (4) The ornamented columns of the proscenium. 
 
 (5) The exit of the chorus at the close of many plays. 
 
 (6) The view of the occupants of the front thronoi. 
 
 The occupants of the front thronoi. 
 
 (7) The steps at Eretria, and elsewhere. 
 
 (8) A low stage would have been preferred to a high stage 
 
 and a platform. 
 
 3 The Steps ; the Distegia : 
 
 If there was passing between orchestra and stage, steps were 
 
 needed. 
 
 No traces of such steps remain. 
 
 Steps would have prevented free action of the chorus. 
 The vase-paintings in Magna Gracia. 
 The depth of the distegia. 
 Had the actors stood on a stage, many of the spectators would 
 
 have had but a poor view of them. 
 
 4 Archaeological Investigations : 
 
 Three sources of information. 
 The ancient orchestra ; other ruins. 
 
 The stage buildings and cavea belong to the same period of con- 
 struction. 
 
 The proscenium more recent than the stage buildings. 
 The columns of the proscenium ; the doors. 
 No fixed type of stage-buildings in early times. 
 
 5 Evidence Against a Stage from the Extant Plays : 
 
 ^Eschylus : 
 
 Supplices. 
 
 Persae. 
 
 Seven against Thebes. 
 
 Prometheus Vinctus. 
 
 Agamemnon. 
 
 Chcephori. 
 
 Eumenides. 
 Sophocles : 
 
 Ajax. 
 
 Antigone. 
 
 Electra. 
 
 CEdipus Tyrannus. 
 
 CEdipus Coloneus. 
 
 Philoctetes. 
 
 Trachinias. 
 Euripides : 
 
 Alcestis. 
 
 Medea. 
 
 Hippolytus. 
 
 Andromache. 
 
 Heracleidae. 
 
 Supplices. 
 
 Hecuba. 
 
 Hercules Furens. 
 
 Ion. 
 
 Troades. 
 
 Helena. 
 
 Iphigenia in T.urus. 
 
THE STAGE 69- 
 
 5 Evidence Against a Stage from the Extant Plays (concluded) : 
 Euripides (concluded) : 
 
 Electra. 
 
 Orestes. 
 
 Phcenissae, 
 
 Iphigenia in Aulis. 
 
 Bacchae. 
 
 Rhesus. 
 
 Cyclops. 
 Aristophanes : 
 
 Acharnians. 
 
 Knights. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Wasps. 
 
 Peace. 
 
 Birds. 
 
 Lysistrata. 
 
 Thesmophoriazusse. 
 
 Frogs. 
 
 Ecclesiazusae. 
 
 Plutus. 
 
 6 Evidence Against a Stage from Certain Facts Connected with the 
 Entrance of Actors and of Choruses: 
 
 All actors entered into the orchestra either by a parodos, or 
 
 directly from the palace in the background. 
 Four aspects of the entrance considered : 
 
 (1) Instances where choruses announce in-coming actors. 
 Average number of verses spoken while actor is approach- 
 ing 
 
 The time required for walking half way across the stage. 
 
 Actors actually seen. 
 
 Actors probably not just about to enter on the stage 
 from door in side- wing when first seen by the choruses. 
 
 Conversations not carried on in the presence of the in- 
 coming actors. 
 
 The actor when first seen was without the stage-buildings. 
 
 The actor when first seen was in the parodos, and 
 approaching the orchestra. 
 
 This view explains various facts. 
 
 (2) Instances where actors announce in-coming actors. 
 This class resembles the preceding class. 
 
 Actors not about to enter on the stage when first seen. 
 
 Actors may have been waiting in paraskenion. 
 
 Actors fail to observe other actors ; they address chorus 
 first. 
 
 Choruses oftener than actors announce approach of in- 
 coming actors. 
 
 (3) Instances where actors announce in-coming choruses. 
 An added element in this class. 
 
 The entrance of the chorus in the Phoenissae. 
 
 The entrance of the chorus in the CEd. Col. 
 
 Antigone probably was not looking directly into the 
 
 parodos from the stage. 
 In this class the actor probably in the orchestra. 
 
 (4) Instances where actors come from the palace. 
 
 If the actor came on the stage he was in his position 
 
 soon after being seen. 
 The actor in this class was actually seen approaching. 
 
70 THE ATTIC STAGE OP THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 6 Evidence Against a Stage From Certain Facts Connected with the 
 Entrance of Actors and of Choruses (concluded) : 
 
 (4) Instances where actors come from the palace (con- 
 cluded) : 
 The time needed for him to reach his position, if this was 
 
 oil the stage. 
 
 A longer time consumed if he entered into the orchestra. 
 In a few instances actors are present soon after being 
 
 seen. 
 
 In a few instances an unusually long time is consumed. 
 In the plays of Shakespeare actors are present soon after 
 
 being seen. 
 
 A comparison of Shakespeare with the Greek dramatists 
 shows that in the former the actors had a shorter 
 distance to pass over. 
 Titus Andronicus Alcestis. 
 Titus Andronicus Hippolytus. 
 Antony and Cleopatra Helena. 
 Additional examples from Shakespeare. 
 The inference to be drawn from the comparison. 
 Actors that entered un-announced. 
 The entrance of actors a pleasing feature. 
 7 Summary of Chapter III. 
 8 The Mistakes of Vitruvius : 
 
 Vitruvius states that the actors stood on a stage. 
 Some historical facts relating to the theatre. 
 The positions of chorus, actors, scenery and fjy.r^yj in the V. 
 
 century. 
 
 The lowering of orchestra in Roman times. 
 The above test as applied to certain theatres. 
 The assumption that the orchestra was divided makes clear 
 
 various facts. 
 Vitruvius drew his inferences concerning a Greek stage from the 
 
 Roman stage 
 
 The description of a Roman theatre. 
 The words of the scholiast in the introduction to the Clouds. 
 
 1 ALLEGED EVIDENCE IN FAVOR OF A STAGE 
 
 In the first century B.C., Vitruvius wrote, in his celebrated 
 treatise 'On Architecture': Ampliorem habent 
 
 The statements . 
 
 of Vitruvius and orchestram Graeci et scaenam recessiorem mmore- 
 poiiux concerning que latitudine pulpitum, quod htYslov appellant, 
 
 the Greek stage. / * m * . . f 
 
 ideo quod eo tragici et cotmci actores in scaena 
 peragunt, reliqui autem artifices suas per orchestram praestant 
 actiones ejus logei altitude non minus debet esse 
 
 pedum X, non plus duodecim. 1 In the second century A. D., 
 
 1 v. 7. 2. 
 
THE STAGE 71 
 
 Pollux Wrote: xa\ axr^ [j.lv, o-<r/.f>>Tor; "ifttnv. i f os r>ftyj(T7'ia. TOO 
 
 y_oj><>n. /.. -. A.I Following the authority of these two writers, it 
 has been the universal belief until very recent years, that the 
 chorus occupied the orchestra, the actors the stage ; but the re- 
 cent excavations of theatres at Epidaurus, Assos, Oropus, and 
 elsewhere, within the last twelve years, and, finally, of the The- 
 atre of Dionysus at Athens, in 1886, have called into question 
 the truth of these statements of Vitruvius and Pollux. Recent 
 writers who believe that the actors stood on a stage neverthe- 
 less do not accept the statement of Vitruvius which says that 
 the stage should be not less than ten, nor more than twelve 
 feet high. Thus, Verrall 2 believes that the plays of ^Eschylus and 
 his immediate successors were acted on a stage less than six or 
 seven feet in height. Haigh 3 believes that at the time of the 
 great dramatists there was a stage six or seven feet in height. 
 There are five passages in the comedies of Aristophanes, in 
 which the uses of the verbs fivapabsiv and -/.ara- 
 ,5tf:W.'v are held to prove the existence of a stage. ftom^LrfttoSaaS 
 If these verbs mean 'to go up,' and 'to go down,' claimed as evidence 
 respectively, it will have to be admitted that 
 the plays in which they occur were acted upon 
 a stage. 4 The passages are : 
 
 wz (nnrr t {> -y ~o)^'. '/.at va>'; (favzi^. Eq., 14-8-9 
 
 ofjL'r))io)>6yQiov. Vcsp., 134-2. 
 
 d/J. , a) ~o<;rjf>(). xcbftC aO)J.(H) aTfx't^j 
 
 aii.pn.-s -or-fiv iiMfiav, :' */ sn^-i-a. Achar., 731-2. 
 
 ., 1514. 
 
 ri dij-a fica-ftifis'.s zyvw, fi/.A on/, a}'-'- 1 * 
 ra<rd\ Xafivr; ; h offat dz xaraftaivst^j iyto 
 
 ., 1151-3. 
 
 1 IV., 123. 2 Class. Rev., volHV., 1890, p. 226. 3 Att. Th., p. 158. 
 
 4 Cf. Muller, B.-A., p. IK), and Haigh, A. T., p. 144, where these passages are 
 quoted, except the one from the Acharnians, and are considered to afford positive 
 proof of a stage. Cf. also the discussion of these five passages in Capps' 'The 
 Greek Stage.' in Trans. Amer. Phil. Ass., 1891 ; in White's "The 'Stage' in Aristophan- 
 es,' in Harv. Stud. Class. Phil., 1891 ; and in Pickard's 'The Relative Positions of Ac- 
 tors and Chorus,' Am. Jour. Phil., Oct., 1893, p. 289f. 
 
72 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 On the first of these passages we have the following scho- 
 
 lium (Eq., 14>9): dyd6aiye ffwrrj/t ry Trotet " 7v, <p7jff}y 7 
 
 Ttap6dou' } TOOTO fQ-ft ^ x dvayzalov. /.SXT^OV o3v oTt dvaftat- 
 ystv l/lyTo TU ITT} TO Jiaystov eiatlvat. o xdl TzpoffxstTat. /t^craj fdj) xara- 
 TO -//arr<T ( /a ivTeuftsy TTO TOO Tra^atoo eftous. (TOUTOV de ol fj.lv 
 , ol de c )Vi/>/5o/ov, ol de <paw EuffouAov sly at. u>? iy Oo;j.i)^ dk TO- 
 
 The scholium is thus given in Dubner. 
 
 In Suidas (s. v. dydfiatye) we have the following words: iff-clu* 
 oTt e'Ae^ov ol itaJLeuol TO ~} Xo'fiov efotlvctt dva6atvetv t xaLTt- 
 
 The explanation g a ^ tv fe T( ) dnaMdrTeff&at iy 
 of Suidas 
 
 ' AptffTO<pdyq$ li dJUiavToita>JLa : osnpo dsofi, 10 ^j'/rare, dyd- 
 
 6 awe ffwTTjf) Ty TTW/ xa} ywy <f>ayei<$." 
 
 It will be noticed that both these scholiasts assume the ex- 
 
 istence of a stage. The point of contention with 
 
 4!?r them is whether the Sausage-dealer came in 
 
 through the parodos and mounted the stage, or 
 
 entered the stage through a wing. The second scholiast, as 
 
 White points out, corrects the first, and says that it should be 
 
 known that to enter upon the stage was called dvafiabetv, and 
 
 that to leave the stage was called xaraffabetv, and that these 
 
 words arose from the old custom. The 'old custom' referred to 
 
 is that which is described by Pollux 1 in the words : c/eo? tf r,y 
 
 T/Hixs^a df)%ata : ^ r f y xpo &l<fittdo$ el? TI$ dvaftdf Tot$%opeoT.a3$ditXptvaT6. 
 
 In the early daj s of the drama when the spectators were seated 
 on the ground, and the single actor delivered his part standing 
 on the table, the verb dyaftabetv was used to denote his mount- 
 ing the table. It naturally resulted that when, in later days, 
 the spectators sat in tiers of seats, and chorus and actors were 
 mingled together in the orchestra, the verb dyaSabety, now stereo- 
 typed, was still used to denote the entrance of the actor. 2 The 
 words of the scholiast are clear, then ; he says that dva6aivsiv and 
 y signify merely 'to enter' and *to leave'. 
 
 1 IV., 123. 
 
 2 Dorpfeld, Recension of Haigh's Att. Th., Berl. Phil. Woch., 1890, 468. 
 
THE STAGE 73 
 
 Capps believes that dvdSatvs in the passage in the Knights 
 
 adds nothing to the meaning of the sentence in 
 
 ., . , avaoaivetv 
 
 which it occurs ; that, as at the beginning otthe in the passage from 
 
 command occur the words feupo tfew//, the whole the Knights has 
 
 . , really no force 
 
 command is equivalent to no more tnan 'Come, 
 come over here'. 1 
 
 In the fourth passage, xa-raSatvsiv is used in a metaphorical 
 sense, and is equivalent to the Latin 'incertamen 
 
 1t ., xaroVv 
 
 descendere', as is now generally agreed among m the fourth pass- 
 
 scholars. In this sense the word occurs in Her- a ^ e is used meta - 
 
 odotus, Xenophon and Plato. 2 It occurs, also, 
 
 in Sophocles, where the words rfrs? d/^tyuot zar^fiav -po ^a/jtw>3 
 interpreted 'certain suitors contended for her hand'. This 
 meaning of the word is recognized by Suidas, who says : %ai 
 
 dojva (uiiv' "cVTttD'Va zarafiawst ~ 
 
 It may be observed, still further, that dvafiabsu is used by 
 other writers where there is no suggestion of as- 
 
 cent. Thus, in Homer, <pdri$ dvSpdrKOUS dvaffabefi a- and zara- 
 
 can hardly contain any notion of ascent ; nor is ffa{vetv ^^ 
 there any ascent implied in the words of Plato : 
 dva6d<s si? TO dixaffTrjptoyG Herodotus uses theword in question as 
 the equivalent of -zpieWsiv, 'to come to', in the words : $ Aswvi- 
 dyv dytfatvej Likewise xaraSatvstv is used where there is no sug- 
 gestion of descent, as in Herodotus in the words : i? ford? zarg- 
 6<u.ve* and in Pindar in the words: drpsxit. xariSa xod(9 where it 
 signifies 'to advance'. 
 
 It is noticeable that in each of the three passages from Aris- 
 tophanes in which occurs dvaSabetv the command 
 
 n _ The commands in 
 
 is given to an actor just alter he has entered. If the five passages 
 we understand that he is commanded to 'come are to actors who 
 
 have just entered 
 
 up', we must believe that he entered the orches- 
 tra while the remaining actors were on the stage, yet there is 
 nothing in the context to indicate that he entered in a manner 
 other than usual. 
 
 1 p. 66f. 2 White, p. 168. 3 Trachin., 5O4. 4 s. v. xardffa. 
 5 C 29. 6 Gorg., 486 B. 7 7, 2O5. 8 1,116. 9 Tj . 3, 72f. 
 
74 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH. CENTURY 
 
 In the passages, then, from Aristophanes, the verbs 
 
 The five passages an( ^ xa ' ufff ^ v ^ COnVCJ II O notion of aSCCttt and de- 
 
 furnish no evidence scent, and, therefore, the passages contain no 
 
 evidence either for, or against, a stage. 
 
 A passage in the Birds is cited by both Muller and Haigh 1 
 as further evidence of an elevated stage : 
 
 A passage in the , x /f 
 
 Birds claimed to //f - p^f^pov 'jutrm, h~. xal OJ] pAlKta. //cf. pAiice vov avo>. 
 
 supply evidence // r . ft)^ O ). II si, -spiaye rov Tfiffyrjlov. AvGS, 175-6. 
 
 The argument from this passage in support of a 
 stage is based upon the assertion that, if the Epops had been on 
 the floor of the orchestra, the command jtifyoy -/ATM would have 
 been meaningless. We know that the scenery in this play was 
 wild and unusual. Euelpides (v. 20ft*) directs Pisthetairus to 
 lead somewhere down the rocks, for he sees no path, and his 
 companion replies that there is, in fact, no path there. We can 
 easily see the two actors as they stood, on this rocky ground , 
 with Pisthetairus on a rock somewhat higher than the ground 
 on which his comrade was standing. In such a situation, the 
 command 'look down' is entirely natural, and contains no evi- 
 dence of a stage. 
 
 Another passage quoted as evidence of a stage is the fol- 
 
 lowing : 
 
 A passage in the ., , v 
 
 Lysistrata claimed tt// y Y a P ! wl ~ 7 l$ " ()ot) 
 
 to supply evidence Jiotnov (TTl %atfi{ov 
 
 TO -f>o$ -o/j.v : TO ffitwv, <>l ff7toodip /<. Lysist., 268-9. 
 The chorus of old men are advancing toward the citadel. The 
 remainder of the path they call ?o fft/wv. The scholium on Lysis- 
 
 trata 288 is I T^ ffifJLOVj <>l fficoudyv %ct}. (TO ~[>o$ TV^S ajtpoicoXtv} TO 
 
 was, then, the ascent leading to the acropolis. We need imag- 
 ine only a ground sloping up towards the proscenium ; up this 
 gentle incline these old men go. At other times during the 
 course of the play, these old men pass over this same ground 
 and enter the house; the chorus of women come from the house 
 and re-enter it, yet in none of these movements is there any- 
 thing in the context that implies ascent or descent. 2 It was 
 
 1 Buhnenalt., p. 109; Att. Th., p. 144. 2 Cf. analysis of Lysistrata, ch. III., 5. 
 
THE STAGE 75 
 
 quite natural for the old men to think of this part of their jour- 
 ney as up-hill (<"/'.>), though the incline was but a gentle one. 
 The end of any journey may seem up-hill, especially when it is 
 performed by old men who are carrying bundles of wood, 1 and 
 when it occurs in a Greek comedy. We must always, in fact, 
 beware lest we take Aristophanes too literally for "no charac- 
 teristic of his is better recognized than the liberty he took in 
 drawing on the imagination of his audience. If the actors said 
 that it was night, to them it was night, though it was in real- 
 ity midday ; if they said that they were going up-hill, the spec- 
 tators could be trusted to believe that the way was steep, even 
 if it were on a dead level." 2 
 
 Danaus, in the Supplices of ^Eschylus, says to his daughters : 
 
 t-r-4 n -t j A- passage in the 
 713-14 supplices (^Es.) 
 
 The words Ixeraftt'ixon ffxti-1,1? are considered as evi- claimed to supply 
 
 . 1 ... evidence of a stage 
 
 dence that Danaus was standing upon a stage. 
 It is, however, quite as reasonable to understand that Danaus 
 was standing upon an altar. At verse 180, when he sees a 
 crowd of men approaching, fearing that harm awaits his chil- 
 dren, he says to them (189): -dyov xpoffi'w r 
 Likewise, at verse 725 he says to his children : 
 Oe&v. It is evident, then, that there were altars near to both 
 Danaus and his children (cf. rwxJs in both passages). Danaus 
 speaks in both these passages exactly as one would expect him 
 to speak, if father, children, and altars were all close together 
 in the orchestra 
 
 Muller 3 cites also Peace 564f. as evidence that the chorus 
 were below the actors. Hermes here says : 
 
 ^ a. ^ ' \\ \ - ~ / A passage in the 
 
 o> IloffSldov, w$ xaAov ro ffritpos w.)TO>v fafsSTai Peace claimed to 
 
 xai -uzvov xal yopydv &ffirep /j.d^a xai rcavdatffia. supply evidence 
 
 It would seem, however, that the passage af- 
 fords no evidence either for, or against, a stage. Muller claims, 
 also, 3 that the conversation between the two Athenians during 
 the entrance of the chorus in the Birds indicates that the birds 
 were below the Athenians; but, as in the passage from the 
 
 1 Cf. vs. 267, 312. 2 Capps, p. 68f. 3 Buhnenalt., p. 109. 
 
76 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 Peace, there seems to be in this passage no evidence either that 
 there was, or was not, a stage. 
 
 Muller cites four passages in which he thinks that the 
 chorus withdrew for a short time, and that the 
 
 Passages where it 1-1,1 111 -,11 
 
 is claimed that the only place to which they could have withdrawn 
 chorus withdrew was the front wall of the stage. 1 The first pass- 
 
 close to the wall 
 
 of the stage age IS : 
 
 fr 
 
 m avatrtat xaxv 
 
 the Choephori 872fF 
 
 Chceph., 872-4. 
 
 Muller, who believes that the chorus stood on an elevated plat- 
 form, believes that in this instance they descended by steps to 
 the floor of the orchestra, and then concealed themselves close 
 by the proscenium wall. It may be observed concerning this 
 passage that evidently the chorus did not at once withdraw, 
 for the servant on entering commands them (877 f.) to open the 
 doors of the palace. Their failure to do as ordered called from 
 the servant (882) the cry, 'I am shouting to the deaf. Wheth- 
 er the chorus then retired there is no evidence from the text to 
 show, but, as they remained during the speech of the servant, 
 which occupied nine verses, and then made no further mention 
 of going away, we have no reason to think that they did go. 
 They next took part with a choral ode at vs. 931ff. Their 
 opening words in this ode were to bewail the calamity of the 
 wretched pair. This implies knowledge of the coming fate of 
 Clytemnestra, which could have been gained only by hearing 
 the conversation that had just taken place between Clytemnes- 
 tra and Orestes. They could not have spoken so confidently, 
 merely trusting to impressions gained from the closing fears ex- 
 pressed by the servant (882ff ). The conclusion, then, that we 
 may draw is that the chorus fail to carry out the desire ex- 
 pressed at vs. 872-4; and remain in their position in the or- 
 chestra. 
 
 1 Buhnenalt., p. 135 and Phil. Anz., 15, 528. 
 
THE STAGE 77 
 
 The second passage is : 
 
 (2) Passage from 
 
 ,,-r _. the Hercules 
 
 avdp -c^/>o//cVov. Here. Flir., 1081-4. Furens, 1081ff. 
 
 Amphitryon here orders the chorus of old men 
 to hasten from before the house ; but there is no evidence that 
 the command is obeyed. Hercules, because of whom they were 
 told to flee, begins speaking at v. 1088, and continues speaking, 
 though perhaps hardly yet awake, for twenty verses. Amphi- 
 tryon then (1109) asks the chorus whether he shall tell them 
 his woes, and they answer him (1110) with assurances that 
 they will not desert him in his calamitous state. They do not 
 take part again till they sing the words that close the play 
 (1427f ); but nothing in the intervening conversation indicates 
 that they are not in their usual place. If the command of Am- 
 phitryon (1081ff) proves anything, it would seem to prove 
 that Hercules was to enter on a level with the chorus, for, if he 
 was to enter on a stage several feet higher than the chorus, his 
 separation from them would be so great that it would be quite 
 unreasonable to expect them to flee from him in fear. 
 The third passage is : 
 
 7T/50? TO rst^tovj ( 3 ) Passage from 
 
 the Ecclesiazusae 
 
 496ff 
 fjteraffxsoa^s ffaurr^v a&ftty foep rjafta.. j5cc/., 4-96-9. 
 
 Muller claims that the Tst%{oy (497) was the wall of the proscen- 
 ium, and that the chorus withdrew beneath the platform, upon 
 which they commonly stood, to the proscenium wall. It is, 
 however, just as satisfactory to consider that the rst%iov was 
 the wall of the parodos. 
 The fourth passage is : 
 
 OU~0$ GLUT 6$ <TTl OV ^7jTOL)fJ.V. // 
 
 f) v^/>, w? ' eotx* t Izfy/srat. ( 4 ) Passage from 
 
 1 the Acharnians 
 
 Achar., 239-40. 2 39f. 
 
 Dicaeopolis is coming from his house to celebrate 
 the rural Diom r sia. The chorus is marching in by the parodos, 
 stating (204ff) their desire to find Dicaeopolis. Soon the} r see 
 him, and give the command 'dsbpo, ixnodtbv' (239f). Dicaeopolis 
 
78 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 and his attendants go forth for their celebration, when sudden- 
 ly the chorus cry (281) '/Stf/xs ,3v///c ,3//c ,3//'. Concerning the 
 passage, three facts are clear. (1) Dicaeopolis marches a long 
 distance before he reaches the chorus, (24-7-280). (2) He ap- 
 proaches near to the chorus. (3) The chorus are all the time 
 in a position where they can watch him. The hiding-place of 
 the chorus, therefore, was in the parodos ; not close to the pro- 
 scenium wall. 1 
 
 Haigh cites three instances in which the chorus did not en- 
 
 ter the palace or tent in the background, though 
 
 The entrance of the it would naturally have' done so, and he thinks 
 
 chorus into the r ,1 * < 
 
 palace prevented that the reason lor this failure lay in the fact 
 
 that the entrance would have involved the diffi- 
 
 cult ascent of a flight of steps. 2 The three instances cited are : 
 
 Ajax, 328-9 
 rapelvatTpwdfftvTffUfj.fJLd%ou9. Hecuba, 104-2-3 
 
 >fj.t < 
 
 Oavdroo vtv ixh'iffafffts' Andromache, 817-18. 
 
 In these passages, although the chorus either is invited to en- 
 ter the palace or tent in the background, or deliberates doing 
 so, yet it stays without. In each instance an actor at once ap- 
 pears, and, therefore, the chorus is not obliged to leave the or- 
 chestra. Haigh thinks that the poet contrived the appearance 
 of the actor in order to relieve the chorus from the necessity of 
 attempting the difficult ascent ; but we may quite as readily be- 
 lieve that it was because the poet wished the action to continue 
 before the eyes of the spectators, rather than within the palace 
 or tent. Again, it will be noticed that in none of the passages 
 in the verb of motion is there any idea of ascent. Thus, in the 
 passage from the Ajax, Tecmessa uses the verb stW/>^//j. There 
 is a clear invitation, in that verb, to the chorus to come in, but 
 no invitation to come up. Had Tecmessa been standing on a 
 stage high above the level of the chorus, in inviting them to 
 come to a level with herself, it is hardly possible that she would 
 
 1 Capps, p. 73. 2 A. T., p. 153. 
 
THE STAGE 79 
 
 not have used some word denoting ascent. In connection with 
 the passage from the Andromache, it may be observed that the 
 nurse, later in the play, says to Hermione (876 f): 
 
 The important words in the two passages are : 
 
 fiatrat rdtvos ninn.a.-Mv fn for passage 817, 
 
 and efffttf rwv oofj.w i><7( for passage 876, and the corres- 
 ponding words in the two passages are practically synony- 
 mous. The former passage the nurse addresses to the chorus, 
 the latter, to Hermione ; and in neither instance is the com- 
 mand obeyed. It would be quite as logical to claim that Her- 
 mione, in the latter instance, was kept from entering the palace 
 because there was a difficult ascent for her to climb in order to 
 reach it, as to claim that the chorus, in the former instance, 
 was kept from entering the palace for a similar reason. 
 
 A passage in Plato's Symposium 1 has been interpreted to 
 signify that Agathon mounted a stage. The 
 reference, in this passage, is to the Odeum, The passage 
 
 which was built 'like a theatre'. 2 Agathon is symposium 
 
 here said to have mounted i-\ ~w ox//V7>r. This 
 oxf>tffjis is understood to mean a 'stage', and, therefore, the infer- 
 ence is .drawn that the theatre had a stage. The weight of the 
 passage as evidence in favor of a stage depends upon the mean- 
 ing of the word fafttfas, and this seems to signify only an eleva- 
 tion in the middle of the Odeum, which resembled the thymele 
 in the regular theatre. On this oxpifias, at the Proagon, the ac- 
 tors mounted, who were to take part in the theatre, a few days 
 subsequently. If it is true that the <*>x;iifia$ was but another 
 name for the stage of the theatre, the question may fairly be 
 asked why the word was not oftener used in this sense. 3 
 
 l Sympos., 194. B.: dvaffatvovTO? -} rov oxploavra fj.srd rwv bitoxptrtoVj xal 
 
 Ivavrta x. r. A. 2 Schol. Aristoph. Vesp., 1109 : 
 
 EffTt ro/ro? OsarpoetdTJS x. r. /. 3 Cf. Class. Rev., 1890, p. 276. 
 
80 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 Haigh maintains that the stone border in the circular or- 
 chestra at Epidaurus would have seriously in- 
 
 The stone border _ 1 ... - f 1 
 
 would not have terfered with the movements of the actors, if 
 interfered with they had stood in the orchestra. 1 There is no 
 
 evidence to show that there was such a border 
 in the orchestra of the Athenian theatre, but, granting that 
 there was, it is difficult to see \vherein it would have caused 
 any serious impediment to the free action of the actors. There 
 was plenty of room within the circle for both chorus and actors. 
 It is urged, also, that, if the actors had stood on a level 
 
 with the chorus, the spectators in the lower 
 
 distin^rshfn^ac- tiers of seats would haYe been unable to see 
 tors Yrom chorus them, except as the chorus moved to and fro, 
 in^he^rchestra thus disclosing the actors. This argument 
 hardly seems to be a strong one, for we know 
 that the bodies of the actors were increased in size by cothur- 
 nus, padding and onkos ; and this was done probably for the 
 express purpose of making them easily distinguished from the 
 members of the chorus. 2 We know, also, that on the modern 
 stage there is no difficulty in distinguishing the principal from 
 the subordinate actors, though there ma\"be hundreds on the 
 stage at the same time. It is true that there are no injunctions 
 handed down to us such as 'the chorus must not obscure the 
 actors', but neither are there any similar injunctions at the 
 present da} r . 
 
 Haigh states his belief that the Athenians, having deter- 
 mined upon a high stage, could not make this 
 sta S e dee P Because, if they had done so, the 
 spectators in the front rows could not have seen 
 an actor standing at the rear of the stage. 3 In the existing 
 ruins of the theatre of Dionysus the lowest step of the auditor- 
 ium is raised a few inches above the level of the orchestra ; the 
 seats in the front row are twelve and one-half inches high. The 
 eye of a person sitting on one of these seats would be about 
 
 1 A. T., p. 145. 2 Cf. ch. III., 8. 
 
 3 Recent excavations show that the roof of the proscenium of the theatre at 
 Athens was eight feet deep ; and all of this could not have been used for a stage (cf. p. 
 89f. below). The suggestion has been made that if the Athenians had wished to have 
 a stage they would have made it deeper, thus allowing more room for the actors. To 
 this suggestion Haigh makes the reply quoted above. Class. Rev . May, 1890, p. 279 
 
THE STAGE 
 
 81 
 
 two and one-half feet higher than the seat, and thus about four 
 feet higher than the level of the orchestra. The thronos in the 
 centre of the front row was about twenty-three metres distant 
 from the proscenium wall. A person sitting in the centre 
 thronos would have been able to see of a person six feet in 
 height standing at the rear of a stage four metres high and four 
 metres deep all except about the lower third of his body. The 
 accompanying diagram makes this fact clear. 
 
 a represents the eye of the occupant of the thronos in the center of the front row ; CD, 
 the proscenium wall ; De, the stage ; and Eg, a person six feet in height standing at 
 the rear of the stage. The scale used is m.=9-64 in. 
 
 $2 THE THYMELE 1 
 
 Some of those that hold to the traditional view that assigns 
 a stage to the actors, and the orchestra to the 
 chorus have nevertheless seen the great difficulty ^ent^bvl'wgh 
 of carrying on a conversation between chorus stage avoided by 
 and actors thus separated ; they haverecognized ,% 
 the close relation that existed between actors 
 and chorus, and have endeavored to meet the difficulties pre- 
 sented by the stage-theory by assuming that the chorus had 
 its position on a raised platform. This platform, they have as- 
 sumed was several feet higher than the level of the orchestra, 
 
 1 The word thymele, when used in connection with the theatre, has four different 
 meanings. From the earliest times an altar of Dionysus stood in the orchestra (cf 
 Pickard, p. 85). To this altar the name 'thymele' w as "sometimes given, as in the pass- 
 age quoted below from Suidas. After the beginning of the real drama, the first actor 
 stood on a table near the altar (Poll., IV., 123)-. To this table the title 'thymele' is 
 applied in Et. Alag., p. 458, 30. 'Thymele' is used also for 'orchestra' (Haigh A. T., p. 
 155), as in the epigram of Simmias Thebanus quoted below. It is used, also, for 
 'stage* in the scholium to Aristoph. Equit., 149 (quoted above p. 72f.), in the words : 
 (Of i'; OoiJ.i/^ ok TO Oi.vi6o.ivs. That Oofj.t/^ here means stage is shown by the scho- 
 lium to Aves, 673: to$ iv Oo;j.i)^ Y^-f* ~(> ( >^^~~^^'' 5 
 Procne (White, p. 166). 
 
 eyotffflC- speaking of 
 
82 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 but not so high as the level of the stage. To this platform the 
 name Oo<j.fy has been given. Among others to advocate this 
 theory are Wieseler, A. Muller, and Hermann. 
 
 Wieseler and Hermann base their theory, in part, upon a 
 The passage from passage in Suidas and Et. Mag. v. w ' : i 
 
 Suidas and Et. fT'/.r^Tj iffTi f; o.lprj Oo (to. TOO jOsaTooo, -apatr'/.r^ia ds TO. 
 
 , T y IV/cv -/.at y//cy T /'-t^ 
 Wieseler and Her- 
 
 mann as evidence TO? xa\ TTJS p-iarfi Obna? 
 a P a 
 
 '/.at ra 
 
 IffTtV U TMTTOf 6 i'/. <FCtv(8tUV %O)V TO C^flt^POfj iy? OV fffCLTpt+OUfftV (>l ll.liJ.Oi. clrot 
 
 /xera rr t v dp%ijffTpav ftwijLos yv TOO dtovbffou, TGTpdytovov olxodopyfjia xevov, i~i 
 TOO tjAffou, o x/?r.' Oo;j.lAr t -aoa TOO Onsiv. [t.STa T^V Oo;j.eXr^ r^ zoviffTpa t 
 TorjTtffTt TO '/.(ITU) eda(f>o$ TOO Oz(i.T(>oo. 
 
 Wieseler argues from this passage that the rsrpd^favov oixM- 
 
 i>.f t i>.a xs>v was not the altar of Dionysus, but was 
 
 The arguments the platform for the chorus; and, therefore, he 
 
 drawn from 
 
 this passage calls this platform the thymele. There is, how- 
 
 ever, no reason why we should not interpret 
 
 the words in the simplest way, and consider that the nlxMwtLa 
 
 was the altar of Dionysus. Hermann 2 believes that the <><>yr;f>Toa 
 
 \vhich is here said to come //sr ffxr^v was the platform upon 
 
 which the chorus stood, but 6/i%rjfrrpa here signifies the Mt-(ti<w of 
 
 the Roman theatre, and on it, as was natural, were the />.?//.'. s 
 
 Muller 4 cites various passages as evidence that the chorus 
 
 stood upon a raised platform. Thus he cites 
 
 Passages quoted L 
 
 by Muller as show- PollUX IV., 1 23 I xat ffxr^ p*v-, -<r/. f >ir<> idwv. 1} di 
 
 ing evidence of>/r^Tf>a, TOO yopon. h r t xat r, Ou^ih,. This passage 
 
 of a platform 
 
 asserts that there was an altar of Dionysus in 
 the orchestra. There is no suggestion that it was a platform 
 upon which the chorus stood. Again, Muller quotes the epi- 
 gram of Simmias Thebanus : 
 
 ~6v trs %ofnri$ fi.l%.<pavra Eoyux/ila -a: da -ixpi/jio, 
 TOV TnaY'.'/.ijS Mofxrr^ arrTioa KszpoitKtv 
 
 1 Cf. Haigh, A. T., p. 154. 2 Opusc., VI., 2, p. 152ff. 3 Cf. ch. III., 8. 
 4 B. A., pp. 129-136 
 
THE STAC.i: 83 
 
 We may believe here, either with Haigh 1 that Oo^i/^ is used 
 with the signification '>'OT'T~/', or with Pickard 2 that the only 
 inference to be drawn from the passage is that the Ou^i/^ and 
 the ffxr^rj were two important parts of the theatre. Another 
 passage quoted is Corp. Inscr. Gr.: iv <T/.r l v</.i<T. /.<t.^>^n<^ -a^oi-r^ 
 fiftsT-f^ ?r %o(toiff> -o//x.' ^ On;i.i/Mi^. All that can 
 
 be claimed here is that the chorus and thymele v; ere associated, 
 unless we again consider that Oop.1)^ is used with the meaning 
 of nftyj^-fKi. So other passages are quoted in which occurs the 
 word Ou,'Mr h but there is in them no suggestion that it was used 
 as a platform for the chorus. The remark of Hesychius, v. /-'"- 
 
 zsftw '.oai^itD', oiia;>.(j. oi kt~'.v b; w ~7 t ^ O');i.i).'f t < ai>y?-<i.'. oUT(a$ : signifies 
 
 that the play begins with a choral ode. The scholium to Aris- 
 tides, III., p. 536 Dind.: <">-? s > tryst ^ rf t ^f/r^-na ^ i<r-> o>,.i/.f t states 
 that the thymele was in the orchestra. Vitruvius, v. 1, 2, says: 
 actores in scasna peragunt, reliqui autem artifices suas per or- 
 chestram praestant actiones itaque ex eo scasnici et thymelici 
 graece separatim nominantur. Here it is stated that the cho- 
 rus, inasmuch as it took part in the orchestra, received a name 
 from the thymele, which was placed there. In the Hyporchema 
 of Pratinas in Athen., XIV., p. 617 C, are the words: rrV <> <>''>!>'>- 
 
 o'K" ; ri T(/.tls ~(i. ~/<>t>z!>.<j.~(>.', r;V u6pt$ ,ao/iV i~\ Atovuatdfia. m/.fjf/.rayf/. Oo>j.i- 
 
 /> ; Here the ~^V ^//:^ is of the musicians \vho desired to lead 
 rather than accompany the chorus, and the -/y-7^ f yy//^/v 
 refers to the th3miele which was made to resound to the stamp- 
 ing of the feet of the musicians . The passage from Isidor Origg. , 
 XVIII., 47: th\'melici erant musici scaenici, qui in organis et 
 lyris et citharis praecinebant, et dicti thymelici, quod olim in 
 orchestra stantes cantabant super pulpitum, quod thymele vo- 
 cabatur, states simply that the musicians sang in the orches- 
 tra standing 'super pulpitum, quod thymele vocabatur', that 
 they stood on some part of the thymele, and hence received a 
 name from the thymele, /. e., were called thymelici. 
 
 1 A. T., p. 155. 2 p. 74-f. 
 
84 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 From all the passages, then, that are quoted as evidence of 
 a platform for the chorus, it seems that not one 
 
 None of the pass- < 1 -i -1,1 * r 
 
 ages supply should be construed to imply the existence of 
 
 evidence of a such a platform. There is no passage in any 
 
 platform. 
 
 ancient writer that either states directly or 
 implies, that the chorus stood upon a platform. It may be 
 assumed that, if such a platform had existed, it would have 
 been distinctly mentioned. 
 
 positive evidence The evidence produced thus far has been neg- 
 
 a platform ative, but there is positive evidence that the 
 
 chorus did not stand on a raised platform. 1 
 1. An important feature at the CityDionysia were the con- 
 tests between the dithyrambic choruses. The drama had its 
 chorus of twelve, or fifteen, or twenty-four 
 
 (1) It would have ' . . "f 
 
 interfered with members ; the ditr^rambic chorus consisted of 
 the dithyrambic fifty members who stood in a circular posi- 
 
 contests. , " , 
 
 tion. In order that the platform be large 
 enough to accommodate this circular chorus of fifty, it would 
 have been necessary that it cover the greater part of the orches- 
 tra; or, if only the dramatic chorus had occupied the platform, 
 it would still have been large enough to seriously interfere with 
 the free movements of the dithyrambic chorus while standing 
 on the floor of the orchestra. Neither of these arrangements 
 seems probable. 
 
 2. If such a platform had existed , there would 
 pfatform'remain * s ^ remain marks showing connection between 
 
 it and the proscenium. No such marks remain. 
 
 3. On the floor of the orchestra of the theatre at Epidaurus 
 
 a large circle was marked out. The inference is 
 the floor of the that the chorus danced \vithin this circle. No 
 orchestra such circle has been discovered at Athens, vet it 
 
 at Epidaurus. . . 
 
 may be conjectured that such a circle existed there. 
 
 4. The columns of the proscenia of the theatres at Epi- 
 
 daurus, Oropos, Eretria, and Athens were high- 
 ornamented ly ornamented . If in front of them there had been 
 
 columns of the platforms, the artistic effect of the ornamented 
 
 columns would have been greatly marred. Fur- 
 
 1 Cf. Haigh A. T., p. 156sq., and Pickard, p. 7Gsq. 
 
THE STAGE 85 
 
 thermore, in the center of each of these proscenia was a door 
 leading into the orchestra. 1 Such a door would have been 
 practically useless, had there been a platform in front of it. 
 
 5. 'At the close of all the plays of Aristophanes, except 
 the Thesmophorizeusae and the Knights, as well as at the close 
 of many of the plays of the tragedians, the 
 
 , , f . ,, ,f , . .,/ ,. (.5) The exit of the 
 
 chorus left the theatre in company with the chorus at the 
 
 actors. There is nothing in the context of these close of 
 
 t ... ,11 many plays 
 
 plays implying that the chorus made a descent. 
 In the Wasps, the chorus leave the theatre dancing, a manner 
 of exit that would have been impossible, if the chorus had 
 been standing on an elevated platform. In the Clouds, the 
 chorus close the play with the words, " Lead the way out; for 
 we have acted sufficiently as chorus to-day." We can easily 
 believe that this order was executed, and that Socrates, Phidip- 
 pides, Strepsiades, and Chaerephon went out by the parodos, 
 followed by the chorus. If the chorus had been on an elevated 
 platform, and the actors on a stage still higher, in order that 
 the command be executed, it would have been necessary for the 
 chorus to wait for the four actors to file down the steps from 
 stage to platform, and then for all to descend the steps to 
 the orchestra, and make their exit by the parodos. That such 
 was the case seems improbable. 
 
 6. A weighty objection to the belief in the existence of 
 a platform is that it would have seriously interfered with 
 the view that the occupants of the thronoi in the 
 
 front row would have had of both actors and (6 
 choreutae. If the choreutae had stood at the of the front thronoi 
 front of a platform that was two and one-half ^j^ 
 metres in height, and extended twelve metres 
 from the proscenium, 2 the occupant of the center thronos in the 
 front row would have been unable to see any part of an actor 
 standing on the stage. (Cf. diagram on p. 81). The line yx 
 represents the choreutes standing at the front of the platform, 
 
 1 Cf. ch. III., 4-. 
 
 2 The height of the platform is assumed to have been two and one-half metres. 
 As the object of the platform was to bring chorus and actors near enough to each other 
 to make conversation easy, and as the stage at Athens was four metres high, in order 
 to accomplish the end desired, the platform must have been :iL least two and one-half 
 metres high. It is assumed t-j have extended twelve metres from the- proscenium. 
 
 TJHIVBRSIT7 
 
86 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 and a the eye of the priest in the center thronos of the front 
 row. If we suppose the choreutes to have stood, not at the front 
 of the platform, but half way back, and the actor to have 
 stood at the front of the stage, hardly more than one-half of the 
 choreutes would have been seen by the priest, and of the actor 
 the priest would have seen not more than the head. Ts repre- 
 sents a choreutes, Ld an actor standing thus. The view of the 
 occupants of the thronoi at the ends of the front row would 
 have depended upon the nearness of the platform to their 
 thronoi. Their view would probably have been no better than 
 that of the occupant of the center thronos ; and the only \vay 
 in which their view could have been made more favorable would 
 have been to have the platform slope toward the sides, from 
 the center line (xo). But even this would not have proved 
 entirely satisfactory, for, in this case, a priest in the end thronos 
 would not have had a favorable view of a choreutes on the side 
 of the platform sloping away from him. Likewise, the view of 
 the priest in the center thronos would have been aided by hav- 
 ing the platform slope toward him also. Thus, to aiford the 
 priests who occupied the thronoi in the front row a view 
 of both actors and choreutae,it would have been necessary that 
 the platform slope from the proscenium toward the front, and 
 from a center line toward the sides. It would not have been 
 easy for the chorus to dance upon such a platform. 
 
 In the ruins of the extant cavea at Athens, the thronoi 
 in the front row, sixty-seven in number, are seen to have 
 been occupied bv men of the highest dignitv. 
 Inscriptions on fifty-four of these seats show 
 that they were occupied by priests, or ministers 
 connected with religion. In the center thronos sat the priest 
 of Dionysus Eleuthereus. Other seats in the front of the 
 theatre were occupied by other dignitaries ; and the seats in the 
 rest of the theatre were occupied by ordinary citizens. 1 It 
 seems highly improbable that the arrangement of the theatre 
 was such that the ordinary citizen had a better view of cho- 
 reutse and actors than the priest of Dionysus had. 
 
 1 Haigh A. T., p. 305sq. This arrangement existed in the time of Hadrian ; but 
 there can be little doubt that a similar arrangement existed in the fifth century B.-C. 
 
THE STAGE . 87 
 
 7. In the theatre at Eretria, which belongs to the fourth 
 century B.C., there has been discovered a flight (7) The ste g at 
 of steps leading from the centre of the orchestra Eretria and 
 
 to an underground passage, which leads to a 
 position back of the proscenium, and, at this point, is a flight 
 of steps similar to the flight leading down from the center of 
 the orchestra. 1 ''The work of the walls of this tunnel is excel- 
 lent; it is older than the stone 'stage'-front which corresponds 
 to the similar structures at Epidaurus, Oropos, and Athens". 2 
 It is quite impossible to imagine more than one use for this 
 passage. Pollux 3 tells us of 'Charon's Steps'. We have in this 
 flight of steps leading down from the center of the orchestra the 
 Charon's Steps of Pollux. A similar passage has been found at 
 Magnesia, and at Tralles. At Sicyon, 4 the passage served as a 
 drain. No such passage has been found at Athens, but it is 
 probable that such a passage existed there. A platform for 
 the chorus would have destroyed the use of such a passage. 
 
 Finally, if we are to believe that there was a platform for 
 the chorus, we must assume that the Greeks first 
 constructed an orchestra for the chorus, and then J*^ 1 
 a stage twelve feet high for the actors ; but, find- preferred to 
 ing that the distance between the two levels was 
 too great to suit the necessities of the drama, 
 that they next built a platform for the chorus, which brought 
 actors and choreutae nearer to each other. It seems incredible 
 that the Greeks, had they made the mistake of constructing a 
 stage too high, would have gone on doing so year after year, 
 when the simple device of lowering the stage would have ac- 
 complished all that was aimed at by a high stage and a plat- 
 form. 
 
 1 Cf. Reprints Amer. Journal Arch., VII., No. 3. 2 Pickard, p. 80. 
 3 IV., 132. 4 Cf. Amer. Journal Arch., vol. V., fig. 9. 
 
88 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 S3 THE STEPS ; THE DISTEGIA 
 
 It is generally admitted that there were instances where the 
 chorus, or its leader, came into personal contact 
 
 If there was pass- . 
 
 ing between orches- with the actors. Haigh 1 admits such personal 
 tra and stage, contact in the Helena, where the leader of the 
 chorus detained Theoclymenus, who was about 
 to enter the palace and kill his sister, 2 or in the CEdipus Colo- 
 neus, where the chorus restrained Creon from carrying oif An- 
 tigone, 3 or in the Knights, where the coryphaeus handed to the 
 sausage-seller an oil flask and some garlic. 4 Haigh admits, 
 also, that in the Prometheus the chorus entered by the stage, 
 that in the Eumenides, at the opening of the play, the chorus 
 of Erinyes were on the stage, and that in the Supplices (Eurip.) 
 the chorus of matrons appeared in the opening scene, kneeling 
 at the feet of ^Ethra. It is evident that, if in these instances 
 there was passing between orchestra and stage, this must have 
 been accomplished by means of steps connecting the two levels. 
 The authority for the existence of such steps is Pollux. 5 
 
 Concerning these steps, it may be observed that no traces of 
 
 any such steps have been discovered by modern archaeologists. 6 
 
 If, as Haigh claims, 7 these steps in the fifth cen- 
 
 ep7an 8tICh tur y R C - were made of wood, and, therefore, 
 have been destroyed, the question remains, wh}% 
 after the stone proscenium was constructed, the steps were not 
 made of stone. Traces of them would then still remain. 
 
 Again, if there had been steps connecting stage and orches- 
 
 tra, they would have extended a considerable distance into the 
 
 orchestra, 8 presenting not a pleasing appearance, and, also, 
 
 probably interfering with the free action of the 
 
 would have chorus. These steps could not have been placed 
 
 hindered free action . 
 
 of the chorus. against the center ol the front of the proscenium 
 
 and parallel to it, for, in that case, they would 
 
 1 A. T., p. 152. 2 Helena. 1621ff. 3 CEd. Col., 856f. 4 Khights, 49Off. 
 
 5 IV., 127: eiffekftovTSf (Ji '/.ard ~j^ "l > y.' / 'j fj ~ !'"'') ^~ J "^ Txr^^v o'.a 7./.:;id- 
 xw; avaffafauutfi. ~^$ '5s x/U'/jiaxf/f <>[ fldJliun, xJLt/iazTijftsy xa/jn^ra'., 
 
 6 Cf. Class. Rev., 1890, p 275. 7 Class. Rev., May, 1890, p. 280. 
 8 Cf. Pickard, Amer. Journal Phil., April, 1893. p. Slf. 
 
77/7; S'I.\<;i; 89 
 
 have seriously interfered with the use of the door in the center 
 of the proscenium. 1 
 
 The existence of these steps is defended by the vases found in 
 Magna Graecia. 2 On these vases are representations of scenes 
 from comedy, and from the center of the stages flights of steps 
 lead down; but Dorpfeld has shown 3 that these vases date 
 no further back than the third century B. C., 
 and that no such vases have been found", except 
 in lower Italy. No vase painters of Athens had 
 set the example of painting such scenes, and this is no reason, if 
 they had, why the painters of Southern Italy should have gone 
 back more than a century for the scenes of their pictures. No 
 chorus is ever found in these lower Italy paintings. These 
 vases, then, seem to have no bearing upon the present question. 
 
 Recent excavations show that the depth of the stage at 
 Athens was about eight feet. 4 The nitr-sri* was a ledge, or plat- 
 form, on \vhich might appear several persons. 
 
 , . f*T- r r t. - The depth of the 
 
 It represented, in general, the roof of a house. o^r^ia. 
 
 How deep this distegia was we have not been 
 told by ancient authorities, but must let the plays indicate. 
 The watchman, at the opening of the Agamemnon, represents 
 that he has spent a year on the distegia. We would naturally 
 conclude that the distegia in this instance was of considerable 
 area. Toward the close of the Clouds, Strepsiades climbs to 
 the roof of the phrontisterion. He says (1495f.) that he 
 is chopping logic with the beams of the house, and (1503) that 
 he is walking on air. Presumably he is not free from violent 
 motions w r hen he thus speaks. In both these instances, then, 
 we must infer that the distegia was large enough to allow con- 
 siderable freedom of action. 6 It seems hardly possible that this 
 freedom could have been obtained on a distegia less than three 
 feet deep. The stage-scenery was as far front of the back wall 
 as the distegia was deep. Allowing, then, three feet for the 
 distegia, and what one may wish for the scenery, there remains 
 less than five feet for the depth of the stage. Those that believe 
 
 1 .Cf. p. 93 below. 2 Haigh, Class. Rev., 1890, p. 280. 
 
 3 Class. Rev., 1890, p. 275. 4 Cf. Pickard, p. 8Of. 5 Pollux, IV., 129. 
 6 Cf also Orestes, 1573ff.; Wasps, 14-3ft"; Peace, 223ff. In the last instance the 
 chorus appears on the distegia. 
 
90 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 that the stage was used for the actors must believe that on this 
 stage, less than five feet deep, appeared at the same time several 
 actors, many attendants, even horses and chariots. 
 
 The construction of the auditorium of the theatre of Diony- 
 sus was such that while all the spectators had an excellent view 
 
 of the orchestra, many of them had only a poor 
 Many would have view of the stage. Thus, a person sitting 
 of the act r rs. ieV near the place indicated by the letter F (cf. plan 
 
 p. 91) would have been able to see but little 
 that was taking place on the stage, if anything at all. The 
 plans of the theatres at Epidaurus, Eretria, and Megalopolis, 
 show a method of construction similar to that of the theatre at 
 Athens. These three theatres belong to the fourth century 
 B. C. It cannot be contended that they were constructed 
 to suit plays in which the chorus was the predominant feature, 
 for, in the fourth century, the importance of the chorus was 
 greatly diminished. If we believe, then, that the actors stood 
 on the stage, we shall be compelled to believe, also, that 
 the Greeks built theatres that gave to many of the spectators a 
 very poor view of the actors. 
 
 4 ARCHAEOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS 
 
 In deciding the question whether the actors stood on the 
 stage, or in the orchestra, we must draw our evidence from 
 three sources ancient writers, the existing ruins, 
 the plays themselves. Of these sources, the last 
 outweighs in value the other two. 1 Before 
 examining the plays of the dramatists, it remains to see what 
 evidence is afforded by the investigations of the ruins on 
 the site of the theatre of Dionysus. 2 
 
 1 Dorpfeld himself in his recension of Haigh's Att. Th., Berl. Phil. Woch., 189O, 
 468, recognizes the fact that the plays are ottr best source of information. 
 
 2 The results of Dorpfeld's investigations are given by Pickard, Amer. Journal 
 Phil., April, 1893; and by Miss Harrison, Class. Rev., 1890, pp. 274sq. 
 
THE STAGE 91 
 
 The oldest of the existing ruins are the remains of an 
 orchestra, HKM(cf. plan) . There are remains, also, of a cavea, 
 
 of stage-buildings, and of a second orchestra. 
 
 That the first-mentioned orchestra has no con- Tbe ancient 
 
 ... ., . , r orchestra; other 
 
 nection with the cavea is seen, at a glance, from 
 
 the relative positions of the two. That there is 
 no connection between this orchestra and the stage-buildings is 
 evident from the fact that the stage-buildings cross the orches- 
 tra. The construction of the supporting walls of this ancient 
 orchestra belongs to some period not later than the fifth century 
 B. C., as is clear from the fact that they are built of irregularly 
 shaped pieces of Acropolis limestone, a material for building 
 that was not used later than the fifth century. These support- 
 ing walls are made necessary because the level of the earth 
 is about six feet lower on the southern side than on the other 
 sides of the orchestra. We know that there were no stage- 
 buildings in connection with this orchestra, because the walls 
 on their outer surface are finely dressed on all sides. If on one 
 side there had been stage-buildings tangent to the walls, on 
 that side it would have been unnecessary to have the walls so 
 finely dressed. These walls present just the appearance that we 
 should expect to find, if the audience was seated on all sides of 
 the orchestra. The inference is strong that it was on this 
 orchestra that the plays of the four dramatists were produced, 
 and, with the picture of this orchestra before us, we can easily 
 see how, in the final catastrophe of the Prometheus, the Titan 
 and his s\ r mpathizing chorus were made to disappear from the 
 sight of the spectators. 
 
92 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The walls of the oldest stage-buildings, and of the cavea, 
 belong to the same period of construction. 
 " Wherever these walls were not exposed to view 
 belong to the as in the inner supporting walls of the cavea 
 
 ort^ro d n f * and in the lower foundations of the stage- 
 
 buildings, they are constructed of blocks of brec- 
 cia of the same size, shape and method of working throughout. 
 If exposed to view, as in the outer cavea wall and in the upper 
 courses [of the stage-buildings], Peiraieus limestone was used. 
 When any portion of the superstructure remains, the Peiraieus 
 limestone is covered by Hymettos marble." 1 It is evident, 
 then, that the stage-buildings and cavea belong to the same 
 period of construction. That this period is the fourth century 
 B. C. is shown by three facts: (1) No ruins in Atnens con- 
 structed as these are belong to a period prior to the fourth cen- 
 tury. (2) At the point A in the supportiug-wall of the cavea 
 are found the letters & and <>, the former of which is of the shape 
 in use after the time of Eucleides. (3) At the point B in the 
 supporting wall is an inscription, 2 the date of which is uncer- 
 tain, but which certainly falls somewhere within the period 
 450-400 B. C. That the inscription could not have been made 
 after the stone which bears the inscription was put in its pres- 
 ent position is clear from the fact that above it are two layers 
 of stone. It is only reasonable to believe that the stone re- 
 mained in its former position some length of time, before it was 
 removed to the cavea wall. The longer we may believe it to 
 have remained in its former position, the later do we bring the 
 construction of the cavea walls. Dorpfeld points, further, to 
 the fact that the fourth century was the great theatre-building 
 time in Greece, and to the improbability^ that so important a 
 structure as the theatre of Dionysus, had it been built in the 
 fifth century, could have escaped mention by classic writers. 3 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 71. 2 Published in CIA, I., 499. 
 
 3 Haigh (A. T., p. 123f.) opposes these views of Dorpfeld, and, relying on the tra- 
 dition recorded by Suidas (v. 7r j o</rj'v9),that after the eollapse of the wooden benches 
 in 499 B. C.. -when Pratinas, ^Jschylus and Choerilus were exhibiting, a stone theatre 
 was built, believes that we are probably justified in assuming that the stone theatre 
 was begun early in the fifth century. 
 
THE STAGE 93 
 
 The proscenium connected with these stage-buildings be- 
 longs to a period still later. The stylobate upon 
 which rested the supporting columns of the pro- J^ ^enTtlTn 
 scenium consisted of Hymettos marble resting the stage-buildings. 
 directly upon a foundation made mostty of 
 breccia. This was a method of construction not in use till 
 after the time of Lycurgus. During, and before, his time, be- 
 tween the marble and the breccia would have been a layer of 
 Peiraieus limestone. The columns of the proscenium with the 
 epistyle were about twelve feet high, corresponding, thus, with 
 the similar parts of the theatre at Epidaurus. The upper sur- 
 face of the stylobate is on a level with the surface of the orches- 
 tra that is directly in front of the proscenium. 
 
 The columns of the proscenium, which rested upon the 
 stylobate, were full columns, .50 m. in diameter. 
 In the center of the proscenium were three doors, The column s f the 
 
 , -. -i -i , ! r , t proscenium ; 
 
 the center door being in the center of the pro- t he doors 
 
 scenium. The width of this door was 1.6 m.; 
 that of the other two a little less. That these were, in truth, 
 doors is proved by the fact that the inter-columnar spaces are 
 greater Tjvhere the doors were than elsewhere, and by the exist- 
 ence in the stylobate of traces of door-posts. Between the cen- 
 ter door and those on the sides of it, there was in each instance 
 but a single column. When the stylobate was constructed, the 
 fronts of the paraskenia were cut off, so that they ended with 
 the stylobate. 
 
 Modern archaeological investigations, thus, show us acavea, 
 an orchestra, and stage-buildings, all belonging 
 to a period later than the time of the great No fixed *yp e 
 
 , , . , ^v, , , ,, . of stage-buildings 
 
 dramatists. They show- us, also, the ancient or- in ea riy times 
 
 chestra "with which no stage-buildings were 
 connected; and this latter fact is strong indication that there 
 was no fixed type of stage-buildings in those days, and that 
 these varied as the individual plays demanded. 
 
94 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 $5 EVIDENCE AGAINST A STAGE FROM THE EXTANT PLAYS 1 
 
 ^ESCHYLUS Supphces 
 As Danaus comes as an escort to his children, the assumption 
 
 is fair that he makes his entrance with them, 
 supplies (JBS.) and sta3^s with them in the orchestra. If he had 
 
 entered between the opening of the play and the 
 time when he begins speaking, it is probable that some an- 
 nouncement of his arrival would have been made. At verses 
 180ff., he mentions the approach of a messenger of an army, a 
 spear-brandishing crowd with horses and curved chariots. He 
 thinks that these may be coming l -/>o>? />?' (184). The use of 
 this last word indicates that he was close to his children. At 
 verse 189, Danaus commands his children : -tifM -pofftZsiv rtiwY 
 aytavtwv Oscw. The word -fatis indicates that the altar was near 
 to the speaker. The command is repeated (191): w/rr^rra pare, 
 and the chorus in reply state their desire to be near their father, 
 in the words: Olhnit liv rfiy <ro\ -i),a^ Opovou? e%ew (208). They 
 again flee to this altar, at the arrival of the herald (836). In 
 none of these instances in which the chorus approached the altar 
 is there reason to believe that they ascended a flight of steps. 
 The altar, then, which was near to both father and children, 
 was in the orchestra. The herald (836) orders the children to 
 go to the ship; he orders them (852) to leave the altars; he 
 threatens to drag them (883); he repeats this threat: s/C^v ?<>'./ 
 upas a-zoaitfiffas x6//.r^ (909). The king tells the herald (940f.) that 
 he may lead away the willing maidens. It is evident, then, that 
 the herald, also, was near to the children and the altar. He, 
 also, was in the orchestra. The king (954f.) bids the children 
 go to the city. They ask (968ff.) that before they go their 
 father be sent to them. He arrives at v. 980, and then leads 
 the way to the city, followed by his children. It can hardly be 
 
 1 Many of the arguments advanced in the following pages have been produced by 
 White, in "The 'Stage' in Aristophanes", Harv. Studies in Class. Phil., 1891 ; by Capps, 
 in 'The Greek Stage', Trans. Amer. Phil. Ass., 1891 : and by Pickard, in 'The Relative 
 Positions of Actors and Chorus in the Greek Theatre', Amer. Jour. Phil., July, Oct., 
 1893. The conclusions reached in the folio-wing pages have, however, been arrived at 
 by an independent study of the plays, and before reading the articles above mentioned. 
 In all cases, where suggestions have been received from those writers, credit has been 
 given to them. 
 
THE STAGE 95 
 
 believed that in this procession the father marched out by the 
 stage, the children by the parodos. 
 
 No scenery was needed for this play. All that was required 
 was an orchestra in which were many altars (Cf. 465), and in 
 which actors and chorus took part. 
 
 Persas 
 
 At her second entrance (598), Atossa announces that she 
 conies without her chariot : >so r o/^tjArw^ (607). 
 Because she thus specifies, we may infer that at Pers 
 
 her first entrance (159) she came in her chariot. 
 It may be safely assumed that in the instances where actors ar- 
 rived on chariots they entered by the parodos into the orches- 
 tra. We have seen that the depth of the stage at Athens was 
 eight feet, or, allowing for distegia and scenery, a trifle less than 
 five feet. 1 There was not room for a chariot on a stage such as 
 that. Though Xerxes arrived in sorry garb (907), it was 
 probable that he was accompanied by attendants, and that he 
 entered on a chariot. He, therefore, as well as Atossa, entered 
 into the orchestra ; and it is evident that Atossa expected her 
 son to come to this place, for, before she left to prepare the liba- 
 tion in honor of her husband, she urged the chorus (529) to es- 
 cort her son to the palace, if he should come in her absence. Evi- 
 dently, the chorus could not act as an escort to Xerxes, if he 
 was to enter upon a stage, while they were in the orchestra. 
 
 At verse 598, Atossa returns with the offerings in honor of 
 her husband. The chorus participate with her in offering the 
 libation (623ff.) 2 The tomb of Darius, therefore, was near to 
 both Atossa and the chorus, a fact that is further shown by the 
 
 words of the ghost (684-): foiMFffatv <T a-/.o>rr; rr^ ifjeqv rdtpou tc&kaSi 
 
 and (686): > r >,ueis 3s Oftr^si-i ^u? f/rrwres 1 r<i<pou. The presence of 
 Darius in the orchestra is shown by the dread of the chorus to> 
 speak in his presence. They say (694f.): 0*60 pat t nsv xptHTid&ff&ai, \ 
 fftfioimt S 1 a-;~ia )*i=ai. Darius, after conversing with the chorus for 
 twenty-two verses (681-702), turns to Atossa and bids her 
 speak (703ff.) The conversation then is between Darius and 
 Atossa, and extends to v. 784, when heagain addresses the cho- 
 
 1 Page 89 above. 2 Cf. Pickard, p. 202. 
 
96 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 'rus: i.wn zuvrjh%s$ (784). This turning, first to one, then to the 
 other, plainly indicates that all were together. 
 
 The chorus (671ff.) call Darius from the lower world. He 
 appears at verse 681, and at once addresses the chorus, though 
 Atossa is present. The underground passage with a flight of 
 steps leading from it to the center of the orchestra in the theatre 
 at Eretria has been described. 1 No such passage has been dis- 
 covered at Athens, but the inference is strong that such a pass- 
 age existed there, and that by means of it the ghost of Darius 
 entered in the present instance, for, if the entrance had been to 
 the stage upon which Atossa was standing, the first words of 
 the ghost would naturally have been addressed to her, not to 
 the chorus. Atossa, in the text, is not recognized b} r the ghost 
 till v. 703. 
 
 At verse 1038, Xerxes says to the chorus : npo$ do/mus 8* .''/><, 
 and he repeats the command at v. 1068 : $ dopou? xts. The play 
 closes with the words of the chorus (1076): -li^w rot vs duffftpAois 
 roots, with which words Xerxes and the chorus leave the theatre 
 together. 
 
 No scenery was needed for this play. The #,? evidently 
 was not in the background. When Atossa enters at v. 598, 
 presumably she came from her house, and this was so faraway 
 that she might have come on her chariot ; else she would not 
 have specified that she had come without it. At the close of 
 the play, when the chorus was ordered to lead to the <5//s, the 
 command was evidently not to lead to a do/w? in the back- 
 ground . This plaj r required only an orchestra upon \vhich both 
 actors and chorus stood. 
 
 1 Cf. p. 87 above. 
 
THE STAGE 97 
 
 Seven Against Thebes 
 
 The play opens with the wordsKad/wv -<>).i-m, ThatEteocles 
 is here addressing many of the citizens is evident 
 from his words : against 
 
 hi.<i<$ dk T VUV xa} T 
 
 -OASC T dpy-peiv x. r. />. (10, 11, 14). 
 and A/' 9 r' t/rAc9 xal 
 
 0a)()ax~ia x. r. A. (30-33). 
 
 The question may fairly be asked whether all these persons 
 would not have more than filled the stage. 
 
 In several places the choreutas are represented as clinging to 
 the altars. At v. 96f., they say: x,ue pfterltuv \ e'/e<r#aK; at v. 
 21 If.: //' ix\ Satfjio'swy xfwdporjLos rj/yv ap- \ %aia, and at v. 258 Ete- 
 ocles says to them: TraArvaro/jiers 1 5 OIYYMUVG fAYa.lfj.dTw, These al- 
 tars were, of course, in the orchestra. But Eteocles also prays 
 to the tutelary deities (69ff.); he must have been near to the al- 
 tars at that time, and, therefore, he was in the orchestra. 1 
 
 At the close of the play, the chorus in two divisions leave 
 the theatre, one division as an escort to the body of Polynices, 
 the other as an escort to that of Eteocles, cf. 1068if. It is rea- 
 sonable to believe that Antigone and Ismene accompanied the 
 bodies of their brothers (cf. the conversation between Antigone 
 and the herald, vs. 1026-53); and to do this it was necessary 
 that they make their exit from the orchestra. 
 
 The scenery of this play is simple, yet more extensive than 
 that of either of the two preceding plays. There were present 
 many altars, as already noted, and there was represented also 
 the acropolis of Thebes, Tdvti' is azpoxohv \ TI/JLIOV ^9, fo/*av (240f.). 
 
 Prometheus Vinctus 
 
 This is the first of the plays of ^Eschylus to require much 
 scenery ; and it requires more than any stage 
 could accommodate. The scene represents a 
 tract of land, 7/Jtv (2); a wilderness, aSpoTov ipr r 
 //':/ (2); a cheerless rock, ^re//-/; xlTpa* (31); crags, -Irpa^ (56). 
 
 1 Cf. Pickard, p. 203f. 
 
98 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 To these crags Prometheus was fastened by mighty force, iyxpa- 
 
 re? ffftlvet (55). 
 
 The chorus at v. 128 enters on its winged chariot, and re- 
 mains in it till, at the request of Prometheus (272), it states its 
 intention of alighting upon the f>xptoffff% %fhm (282). It is evi- 
 dent that during the time of speaking these verses (128-282) 
 the chariot, with the choreutae within it, was not suspended in 
 the air. They state in v. 130 that they have come r<fis -fiynv ; 
 Prometheus asks them to gazeupon his fetters (141 if.); and this 
 the\ do (144if.). If the car containing the chorus was not in 
 the orchestra, it was resting upon the stage ; yet the rock upon 
 which Prometheus was bound must have occupied so much of 
 the stage that there would not have remained sufficient room 
 for this winged chariot. 
 
 At v. 282, the chorus say that they will alight upon the 
 jagged ground. Haigh 1 here understands that at this point 
 the chorus descend to the orchestra. The words of the verse 
 are: 6xpwlff<nj %fh\ r%fis jrsAoi. There is nothing in these words to 
 imply that the chorus descended from stage to orchestra ; nor 
 has anything been said in the text implying that the orchestra 
 was oncosts i. e., granting that the action took place on the 
 stage. It was the latter that was oxpiosi^. If, then, up to this 
 point the choreutae have been on the stage, the verse means that 
 the choreutae alight from their car upon the rocky surface of the 
 stage. Before the intention of the chorus to alight is more than 
 spoken, Oceanus enters (284) on winged steed; and thus a 
 horse and rider are to be added to the numbers present on the 
 already overcrowded stage. 
 
 At vs. 1058ff., Hermes warns the Oceanidae to withdraw 
 from the spot, lest the thunder smite them. This they refuse to 
 do, and, after protestations of sympathy for the sufferer, final- 
 ly meet their doom together with him . On the assumption that 
 Prometheus was on a stage, and the chorus in the orchestra, 
 there is difficulty in understanding how both actor and chorus 
 were made to disappear; but, if we believe that the position of 
 both the Titan and his sympathizing chorus was the floor of 
 
 1 A. T., p. 152f. 
 
THE STAGE 99 
 
 that ancient orchestra, the southern side of which was several 
 feet higher than the ground, 1 there is less difficulty in under- 
 standing how actor and chorus were caused to disappear. 
 
 Agamemnon 
 
 In the background was the palace of the Atreidae, tr-lm* 
 \-\rftst8a>* (3). In the speech that opens the play, 
 the \vatchman states that on the roof of this Agamemnon 
 
 palace he has kept watch for a 3^ear. The roof 
 of the proscenium would have afforded a more suitable place 
 upon which to keep so long a \vatch, than would a distegia of 
 three feet in depth. 
 
 The herald, v. 524, cautions the chorus to warmly welcome 
 Agamemnon on his arrival: zo w aff-dtraffH^ and in verse 601 
 Clytemnestra states it as her intention to welcome back her 
 husband : ff-sb<rw -/> ,WKT nizafffta>. As he is, thus, to be wel- 
 comed by both actor and chorus, we may expect him to come 
 to a place common to both actor and chorus. He arrives (782) 
 in his chariot, and we need not doubt that he entered the or- 
 chestra. The chorus in saluting the king states its desire not to 
 fall short in showing him affection, xaipov %dptru$ (787). This 
 affection would have seemed rather a cold one, if the king had 
 been high above the chorus, on a stage. 
 
 At verse 906, the queen invites Agamemnon to alight, and 
 (908f.) calls upon her attendants to spread tapestry for him to 
 tread upon. If this action took place upon the stage, there 
 \vere upon the stage a chariot, the attendants of Clytemnestra, 
 the attendants of the king, for, though no such persons are 
 mentioned, a king would not have come unattended, besides the 
 queen herself, and space upon which to spread the tapestry. 
 
 At the cry of Agamemnon, after he has received his death- 
 blow, the chorus exclaims (1350): i'to} 8* 8-to$ rdyttrrd f i;j~s(r^ 
 doxst. Such a sentiment as this would not have been expressed 
 if there had been a difficult ascent to climb in order to reach the 
 palace; nor, in this case, would the verb used have been^.-^iv. 
 Some verb expressing ascent would have been used. 
 
 When Clytemnestra re-appears, she points out tothechorus 
 
 1 Cf. p. 91 above. 
 
100 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 the body of the slain king, with the words: <>UTI*S <mv \\^a.i>.ii^^^ 
 &/JLOS | -/n9, Xf)u? <Jz (1404f.). We can easily believe that at this 
 time the chorus surrounded the dead body, (cf. their lamenta- 
 tions 1489ff. and 1513ff.). Likewise, while the chorus and Cas- 
 sandra are carrying on the -long conversation (1053-1330), we 
 naturally think of the chorus as gathered around the captive. 
 Cf. their pity expressed, <>ixT{/><u <rs, 1321. 
 
 The scene in which occur the threats of ^Bgistheus and the 
 chorus would have lost all force if ^Bgistheus had been raised 
 on a stage above the chorus. The chorus says (1651): ela&y, 
 f>6xa>K<wnasTt<iijTpxtZ{Tat, to which ^Egistheus replies (1652): 
 JV xayai irpoxutiws tw d*aivofj.at Oavelv. 
 
 Chcephori 
 
 To the palace in the background there are numerous refer- 
 ences: 86/jLatv (22), xn/Ms (561), ofjfHjis (652), do/twv 
 (712), Mums (885). At the opening of the play, 
 Orestes is sitting at the tomb of his father, TU/JI- 
 fiou (4). At v. 22 the chorus enter announcing that they have 
 corneas an escort to the libation. They w^ent, therefore, to the 
 tomb. Orestes, then, at the opening of the play was in the or- 
 chestra. Since Electra entered with the chorus, she also went 
 to the tomb in the orchestra. At v. 149, Electra pours the liba- 
 tion, and the chorus participate by chanting as the offering is 
 made, doubtless surrounding the tomb as they do so. 1 
 
 After the murder of ^Egistheus, Orestes displays the robe in 
 which ^Egistheus was captured, and says to thechorus [983f.]: 
 
 ixTst^ar' anro xa} xnx/.w napaffradov | rrrt^/rr/>ov v(5//o? dlzaffO" , and with 
 
 these words we may understand that he handed the robe to the 
 chorus. 
 
 Eumenides 
 
 The chorus (140ff.) rush from the temple of Apollo in search 
 of Orestes. At v. 179, Apollo says to the cho- 
 
 Eumenides TUS : ^tt>, X/.si)cu J TttmJe dwfj.(i~toy ~fi%o$ I ywpGtT , W"e 
 
 may, therefore, infer that they lingered near the 
 temple. 
 
 1 Cf. Capps, p. 45. The fact that Electra and the chorus were together during thivS 
 libation convinced Hermann that the tomb was on the margin of the stage. De re. 
 seen, in ^Esch. Orest., p. 9: "Non est dubitandum quin sepulcrum Agamemnonis in 
 margine proscenii sit." 
 
THE STAGE 101 
 
 At vs. 244ff., the chorus of Furies are searching for Orestes. 
 They must have entered the theatre b} r the same route by which 
 he had entered. Their words are: 
 
 /-,';> TOO' i<TT\ rdwd/x}? izyxwks rlxf/.a/r 
 
 TtftoS alfj.a 7.a\ tTTa/.affu>y lxfj.aretjofi.ey. 
 
 That the Furies search in all places where Orestes would be like 
 ly to be is shown by their words (255f.): 
 
 opa opa f 
 
 He is at last found at the altar of Athena: -sp\ ppiret Tr 
 
 dijf)f>(',Too (259). The chorus, thus, in this search scene are on the 
 
 stage, if there was a stage. 
 
 At the trial scene, we may believe that all the participants 
 \vere together. The Furies, as prosecutors of Orestes, would 
 naturally be near him. The judges, the men of the Areopagus, 
 would not be separated from either plaintiff or defendant. Be- 
 sides these, there were present Apollo, Athena, who presided, 
 the servants of the temple, who at the close of the play led the 
 procession, and altars, of Earth (2), of Themis (2), and of 
 Athena (446). There was room for this trial scene only in the 
 orchestra. 
 
 At the close of the play, Athena says (1003f.): xporipav d' l/j.s 
 /j>rj | <7Tr/cw OaXd!J.oos dxode{~ouffa<;. At the head of the procession 
 proper are the servants of the temple with lighted torches, (cf. 
 1005): ~/>o9 ^o>9 ispov rtivde rrpoxofj-a)';. Nextin theprocessioncome 
 the Areopagites, who are followed by the Eumenides, (cf. lOlOf.) : 
 
 -aides Kpavaou ralffde /i.eToixoi$. 
 
 It seems highly improbable that the splendor of this clos- 
 ing scene was marred by having different parts of the proces- 
 sion leave the theatre on different levels. 
 SOPHOCLES Ajax 
 
 When the chorus returned from their search for Ajax (866), 
 as they were still searching for him, it is only 
 reasonable to suppose that they looked in the Ajax 
 
 places where he would likely be. The search 
 
102 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CEXTl'KY 
 
 continued till Tecmessa found him (891). That the chorus 
 roamed for so long a time on the stage is not probable, nor is 
 it probable that Tecmessa was searching on one elevation, and 
 the chorus on another. The extent of the place in which the 
 search occurs is shown by the circumstances of the finding 
 of Ajax. Tecmessa finds the body, and exclaims: id> ;>.<>i ;un 
 (891.) The cry is heard by the chorus, but at first they do not 
 see Tecmessa (892). Finally they cry : nnf>>>.<>i>nv w^w <, f x (894.) 
 The search for Ajax then takes place in the orchestra. 
 
 At v. 984 Teucer asks where the son of Ajax is. The chorus 
 reply (985) that he is in the tent. Teucer says (986) : ^r 1 ,>-! 
 a'lcj? dsupo; Though the order is not executed, it would not have 
 been given if great difficulty had stood in the way ol its execu- 
 tion. Finally, the boy comes from thetent (1168); Teucertakes 
 him to the corpse of his father (1172), and intending himself to 
 depart, in order to prepare for the burial of Ajax, he commends 
 him to the care of the chorus. Cf. 1182f.: 
 
 It is evident that during this scene chorus and actors were to- 
 gether. 
 
 At v. 329 Tecmessa says to the chorus : //^7^ sitrsMvTs?. 
 They do not obey the command, yet they go very near to the 
 tent. At v. 344 the chorus ask Tecmessa to open the door, and 
 at v. 346 she opens it, adding: -/^xrff/^-sjv F s'=<rri <TOI. At v. 354f. 
 the chorus comment on what they see within the tent, and at 
 v. 361 they are so near Ajax that he even commands them to 
 slay him. In this scene, then, the chorus is on the stage, if there 
 was a stage. 
 
 The pla3 r closes with a procession, in which all leave the 
 theatre together. References have been made to the burial of 
 Ajax, cf. 1413ff., where Teucer says : //' V ~"*> &"$ "*'' 
 
Till-: STA(rI- 103 
 
 Antigone 
 
 When Ismene enters, she approaches so near to the chorus 
 that the\- notice closely her troubled counte- 
 
 nance. Cf. 526ff.: Antigone 
 
 y.a\ n. : f^ ~in> f>/.(0's ~/i<) 'JiffHj^jj 
 <f /<?c /cf y.i'i.rin 00.7.11')' ?'.f><>;i.i-;~f t ' 
 
 When Creon enters with the lifeless body of his son, the 
 chorus are the first to see his approach, and his first words are 
 to them. Cf. 1261ff.: 
 
 (FTSftStt 
 
 HOW T near the chorus at this time drew to the body of Harmon, 
 it is impossible to say, but it is only natural to believe that 
 they actualty surrounded it. 
 
 At the conclusion of the play, Creon saj r s (1339): 
 
 Creon has been conversing with the chorus since v. 1317, and 
 the command we may believe is addressed to them, and that 
 with the closing words of the chorus vs. 1347-1353, chorus and 
 actors leave the theatre together. 
 
 Electra 
 
 The sympathy that the chorus felt for Electra was so great 
 that we do not naturally think of them as 
 separated from her in position. This sympathy Electra (soph.) 
 is displayed in the conversation that takes 
 place between them vs. 121-327. At v. 130 Electra calls the 
 chorus her solace (-/>a/jF/>vi/), at v. 229, her comforters (-/>- 
 yoftot.) During vs. 804-874 Electra and the chorus are again 
 alone, the chorus here (cf. 828 if.) trying to comfort Electra. 
 At v. 1204 Orestes would speak in their presence, if convinced 
 of their friendliness, and at v. 1204 Electra assures her brother 
 that thev are friendly. 
 
104 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 When the attendant arrives (660), he addresses his first 
 words to the chorus, asking whether he is at the palace of the 
 king. Clytemnestrais at the time present. Had the attendant 
 entered on a stage, on which an actor was present, he would 
 not have directed his first words to the chorus. Similarly, 
 when Orestes arrives (1098), he addresses the chorus first, 
 though Electra is present. In the latter instance, after the 
 chorus (1102) have assured Orestes that he is at the palace of 
 .^Egistheus, Orestes asks them, v. 1103 f.: 
 
 'fjif.a)'; 1tO$6tvi)V XOtVOTCOUV TTC 
 
 It is evident from this question that it would not have been 
 difficult for a member of the chorus to go from orchestra to 
 palace. It is true that no member of the chorus actually 
 does go into the palace, but, as in all the instances where the 
 chorus is ordered to enter, or deliberates doing so, the failure 
 to enter the palace can in no way be construed as evidence that 
 there were steps to climb, in order to reach it. The fact that it 
 is suggested that they enter is sufficient evidence that to do so 
 is not unusual, or difficult. In none of the cases that occur of 
 a deliberated or an ordered entrance, is there any suggestion of 
 difficulty, or any verb used implying that an ascent would have 
 to be made. In the present instance, the chorus turn to Electra, 
 and (1106) bid her go within the palace; but she also fails to 
 go. It could not be claimed that her failure was due to the 
 difficulty of reaching the palace. 
 
 CEdipus Tyrannus 
 When the chorus bow as suppliants before the king (40f.), 
 
 and, again, when they prostrate themselves be- 
 cEdipus Tyrannus fore thepricst (327), we may believe that chorus 
 
 and actors \vere not separated. The priest 
 assumes that the suppliants were with him : (& -aidss, iffra> l 'j.e<T$a, 
 147). * At the close of a long conversation (988-1045) between 
 CEdipus and the messenger, suddenly the messenger addresses 
 the chorus (1046), and then CEdipus addresses them (1047), as 
 bystanders: w/x*> rwv ra/><rrwr>v -;/?. This freed om of con versa- 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 211. 
 
7 HE STAGE 105 
 
 tion implies closeness of position. Had the messenger (924) en- 
 tered upon a stage, inasmuch as Jocasta was standing there, 
 he would not have directed his first words to the chorus. 
 
 Though nothing in the context leads us to think that the 
 chorus ascended from orchestra to stage, they were there, if 
 there was a stage, when CEdipus ordered them to take him 
 away, and when he ordered them to touch him. Cf. 1340 f.: 
 
 //, 
 v it.i-fav and 1410ff.: 
 
 Also Creon orders the chorus to take GEdipus awa}-. Cf. 1429: 
 
 CEdipus Coloneus 
 
 The scene of this play was the grove of the Eumenides, 
 csv; Os(M (10), a*Mo$ (98), in which were the bay, 
 the olive, the vine (17). Into this grove Antigone (Edip 
 had conducted her father. At the entrance of 
 the citizen of Coloneus, CEdipus retired from the sacred grove 
 (36if.). If, at this time, he was on the stage, as the grove must 
 have occupied the greater part of it, we must believe that he 
 withdrew to one end of it; and we must believe, also, that all 
 the actors in the play stood at one end of the stage, for they, 
 also, would not tread on hallowed ground. If this was the 
 case, it is difficult to see where the attendants of Creon stood 
 (723), or now Ismene entered on horseback (324). 
 
 After the chorus have ordered CEdipus to withdraw from the 
 grove, the following conversation takes place (178, 180 f.) : 
 CEd.: -f)t>6oj] Chorus: i-if>a&t -o/xnn. 
 CEd.: err; Chorus: vpodiSa^Sj nodpa^ \ -6/tfrw 
 
 Such a movement as that could have taken place only in the 
 orchestra. 
 
 When the chorus enter, they search for CEdipus, xfwfftifyzorj, 
 Isnffffi w, | xfwffxsnftou -<rayr t they say (121O. If they looked 
 'every where' for CEdipus, they must have looked for him on 
 the stage; yet nothing indicates that they make an ascent. 
 
106 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 In two instances, actors on entering direct their first words 
 to the chorus, though other actors are present, viz: Theseus at 
 v. 1500, though CEdipus is present, and Creon at v. 728, 
 though Antigone and CEdipus are present. It would have been 
 entirely unnatural in these instances for Theseus and Creon to 
 enter on a stage, on which were other actors, and 3^et direct 
 their first words to the chorus. 
 
 The nearness of position of chorus and actors is shown by 
 the fact that CEdipus calls the chorus his allies (815) ; CEdipus 
 trusts them (175), and they say that nobody shall take him 
 away (176 f.) : they will protect him (491). Antigone also is 
 counselled toprotecther father (508). At v. 803 CEdipus refers 
 to the chorus as 'mnffds robs -=/'V. Creon says (832) that he is 
 taking away his own [Antigone and Ismene] ; The chorus 
 threaten him (834 f.) ; Creon bids them take their hands from 
 him (836), and this they refuse to do (836). The chorus repeats 
 its command (838 f.) Antigone is being dragged away (843). 
 Creon again forbids the chorus to touch him (856), but they 
 persist in defending Antigone (881), and, finally, they see The- 
 seus and his attendants approaching, and cry to them to hast- 
 en to the rescue (884 f.) There is no reason to think that in this 
 scene the chorus is on the stage. The action, therefore, took 
 
 place in the orchestra. 
 
 Philoctetes 
 
 No Greek stage was large enough to accommodate the 
 
 scenes represented in this play. The scene repre- 
 
 phiioctetes sents a shore (1), a cavern with double entrance 
 
 (16), a fountain (21). So extensive is the place 
 
 that, at the moment, Ulysses does not see the cavern (28). Ne- 
 
 optolemus tells Ulysses that the cavern is above them (29), and 
 
 so near to it is he that he discovers trodden leaves within it 
 
 (33). Evidently, a path leads to the cavern (22). At v. 1262 
 
 Neoptolemus speaks of the cavern as 'rocky.' 
 
 At v. 29 Neoptolemus hears no sound within the tent ; at 
 v. 207 the chorus hear Philoctetes crawling, />rvrs\ At v. 
 861 the chorus describe the look on the face of Philoctetes ; at 
 v. 866 Neoptolemus notices that he is moving his eye. In these 
 instances chorus and actor are equally near to the tent. 
 
THE STAGE 107 
 
 The chorus, in this play, have a part to perform that is the 
 same as that of Neoptolemus and Ulysses : we therefore expect 
 to find no separation in position. At v. 48 Neoptolemtis says 
 that Philoctetes is approaching, and that the path shall be 
 watched [by him]. At vs. 150ff. the chorus speak of their duty 
 of watching for the coming of Philoctetes, adding their fear lest 
 he approach to them unobserved. It is clear, then, that Phil- 
 octetes was to approach to a position occupied by both 
 chorus and Neoptolemus. 
 
 At v. 825 Neoptolemus brings the chorus into the action 
 with himself; /// ia<7t>>.z';, ^7of,he says. When Philoctetes vents 
 his rage (927-962), the chorus reply (963), ri dpA/iev; two other 
 actors being present at the time. When Philoctetes appears 
 (219), his opening words are to both chorus and Neoptolemus 
 (cf. &<n 219). 
 
 The possibility of personal contact between chorus and 
 actor is clearly implied when, in order to prevent the execution 
 of the threat of Philoctetes to cast himself from a rock (lOOlf), 
 Ulysses commands the chorus to lay hold of him (1003). This 
 same possibility is implied in the conversation between Philoc- 
 tetes and the chorus (1174-1205). Here Philoctetes fears that 
 the chorus may take him back to Troy (1174f.) ; the chorus re- 
 ply (1176) that they may do so ; Philoctetes orders them to 
 leave him (1177). As they move away, intending to go to the 
 ships (1180), he calls them back again (1184f.) ; he repeats the 
 invitation to return (1190), adding that he would make but 
 one request of them (1203), that they give him an axe, or a 
 sword, or some other weapon (1204f.) 
 
 At the close of the play, all leave the theatre together with 
 
 the words of the chorus: %Mpw'j.sv dij -r/vre? ao/Jel? (1469). 
 
 Trachiwse 
 
 If the actors were on the stage, in this play, they did not 
 have very much room for action, for there were 
 present many maids (202f.), and many others Trachiniae 
 
 of the train of Hercules (299f.). 
 
 At 964ff. the chorus see the body of Hercules being brought 
 in. This body was evidently brought into the orchestra, for 
 
308 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 thechorus are so near to it that they notice that it is speechless. 
 Furthermore, it is a sympathizing chorus, shuddering at the 
 fate of Hercules (1044 if.) 
 
 The sympathy existing between Deianira and the chorus 
 was such that we would not expect them to be separated. She 
 conies forth (531ff.) to tell them her woes in private (/aV 
 533); and again she tells them her woes (663if.). Twice she 
 calls the chorus her friends (298, 531) ; and it was not likely 
 that she would tell the chorus (594ff.) her plans in the presence 
 of the herald, with the injunction to keep them secret, unless 
 she was in the orchestra so close to them that the herald could 
 not hear what the plans were. 1 
 
 EURIPIDES Alcestis 
 The chorus are near to the house of Alcestis, for they notice 
 
 (86f. that there is no wailing, or beating of 
 Alcestis hands within the house ; that there is no water 
 
 before the gates (100) ; and that there is no 
 shorn hair in the vestibule (101). 
 
 In the funeral procession, it is inconceivable that the body 
 and chief mourners leave on one level, while the principal part 
 of the procession leaves on another. Admetus, in addressing 
 the chorus, says (422ff.): 
 
 aAA 1 x<f><>f)dv y<i{> toode 0TJffo/j.a,t vsxpoo. 
 
 ~df)ffT '/Ml fJ.lv OVTSf dvTrj%rj(TfJt.T. 
 
 7Tttva TW x7w'/v ouTicovdw //soi j and, again, 
 
 (606ff.)l avftpuw fopatwv nfj.';rj? -aftooffia, 
 
 vizov /j.sv rjdrj -ndvr zynv-a. itpoffftohn 
 tplpoofftv apdijv s>$ rdtpov TS xa} -nj><w 
 
 icpoff&faaT iztovffav oa-d--r t v fidov. and, again, 
 
 (T40)l <fT&i%<OftMV j u) fiv tv TTOfta ( /w//v yex^ov. 
 
 On the return, Admetus says (861): iat. a-ufw. -itixradoi, and 
 the chorus say (872): KpuSaitpt'tfta' paftt xeV/of <>?x<uv. The chorus 
 and Admetus leave the orchestra together, and together they 
 return into the orchestra. 2 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 21 2f. 2 Cf. Capps, p. 14f. 
 
THE STAGE 109 
 
 Medea. 
 
 The sympathy existing between Medea and the chorus was 
 such that we would not expect them to be sep- 
 arated from each other. At v. 1116 she calls Medea 
 
 them her friends (^t'/af), just as at v. 138 they 
 had spoken of her family as friendly (ps/ov). In the conversa- 
 tion in which Jason, Medea, and the chorus take part (866ff.), 
 both the chorus and Medea are moved to tears. Cf. 90 5f. 
 
 The chorus (180ff.) tell the nurse to bring Medea from the 
 palace. We may naturally infer that she was to be brought to 
 the place where thechorus were. The words of the chorus were: 
 //r/ fined v.v osoixt itopeuffov <>l'xw; zEw. At v. 820 Medea savs to 
 the chorus : /./' s7 /w/' - -/.a} xo>t.i? Vv, and that one of the cho- 
 rus actually did go to the house for Jason may be inferred from 
 the latter's first words on entering (866): i t xw /-/^W>^V. 
 
 When Medea is about to kill her children, the chorus medi- 
 tate entering the house (cf. 1275, -/>?/ Vw W/ju/u?;), and the sons 
 call to them to come to their aid (cf. 1277, >;'. -<>o* Ozar,, a^a-"). 
 The chorus, at this time, were standing near the house, as may 
 be inferred from Jason's words (1293): Y'""- 1 - 7 -^ '- '?,<*<*" */ 
 
 Tc tfTi'^C. 
 
 Hippolytus 
 Phsedra says to the chorus in vs. 575ff.: 
 
 UltUtAOfJLSffftoL) Tdlffd iltlffTOLffat ~''i/.a'.^. 
 
 fkxouffatrft <i><>^ X;/,^.ooc iv dofjmt<i ~i~vsi^ 
 to which the chorus reply, v. 577 f.: 
 
 There is, in neither the order nor the reph r , any intimation that 
 the chorus would be obliged to make an ascent in order to reach 
 the house. 
 
 When Phaedra hangs herself, the nurse asks the chorus to 
 render aid : ^yVv'-^r* -'>$- oi - ; '/^ i-o,,.o^ (777). The chorus de- 
 liberate whether the shall enter the house. Cf. 782f.: 
 
 )J><r(j.i r avaffffav ^ i-ifT-atrrtir; fiju'r/ct)'; ; 
 
 The words of the nurse, v. 786f. show them that it is too late 
 for them to be of assistance, so they do not enter the house. 
 
110 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 When Theseus arrives, he addresses the chorus (790): Y 
 
 I'frre T? -or h do pots ,:l<>rj ; to which they reply (804): T"tfoDTo 
 
 aprt yap zdfo) dfwt$. From this we may infer that, though they 
 did not enter, they approached near to the house. 
 
 Hippoh^tus was certainly not on the stage, when he asked 
 the chorus to conduct him away. Cf. 1098f.: 
 
 Andromache 
 
 A stage would not have been large enough to contain the 
 
 shrine of Thetis, at which Andromache was sit- 
 
 Andromache ting at the opening of the play. It is referred 
 
 to by several different names : Va//jt (115), f- 
 
 Aaov dpav (135), ft u> !>.<!. \'f l j>rjO<i$ ~noz | on ^w't.u^ of)dk vuo$ (161f.). It 
 
 could not have been in the background, for the palace was there; 
 it was, therefore, in the orchestra. 1 
 
 At vs. 879f. the chorus announce that Orestes is coming 
 toward them (~f>o? ^.as, 880). When he arrives his first words 
 are to the chorus (881f.). He states that he is present to learn 
 concerning Hermione (cf. 887ff.). Hermione is herself present, 
 and answers him (891ff.). He, thus, does not observe Her- 
 mione, till ten verses after his arrival. This scene is rendered 
 clear, only on the assumption that the chorus see Orestes com- 
 ing to ward them over the parodos, and that he sees them before 
 he sees Hermione, and, therefore, addresses them first. When 
 Peleus enters, v. 547, his first words are to both chorus and 
 Menelaus: "/'-? c//wri rwv /.. r. /. 
 
 The sympathy that the chorus feel for Andromache may in- 
 duce us to believe that they were not separated from her. (Cf. 
 
 xr//rr, 141; tjjz~stf>\ 421). 
 
 The nurse requests the chorus to enter the palace and render 
 aid: w^iV ds fiatrai ra>>3s $>>w-(,r; strw (817). The entrance of Her- 
 mione makes it unnecessary for the chorus to obey the com- 
 mand, yet, if to do so had involved either difficulty or ascent, it 
 is natural to believe that something in the text would have so 
 implied. 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 278, 
 
THE STAGE 111 
 
 Heracleidae 
 
 At vs. 69f. lolaus calls on the chorus to defend the sons of 
 Hercules: <*> ~? *Afti[va$ Sanov olxoovres gpovov | d/j.u- 
 vetf. Copreus threatens, despite the protests of Heracieid* 
 
 Demophoon, to drag away these children : ru<r- 
 3e <T ooy. fej? Korl (252; cf. also 253ff.). The chorus order Co- 
 preus to depart. Cf. 273 : 
 
 JineJi&e' '/MI (To roods IJ.TJ Oiyrfi^ avac^ 
 
 whereupon, Copreus replies that he yields to their numbers 
 (274): ffrs('/o)' mas yap %stf>us dtrOsvijs fj.fr/rj. It is evident that the 
 chorus could not have thus inspired Copreus with fear, if they 
 had not been near to him. 
 
 The children were certainly near to the choreutae, when lo- 
 laus ordered them to extend to the choreutae their hands, and 
 the choreutae to extend theirs to the children. Cf. 30 7f.: 
 
 doT j (o Ti/'/, ai)~oi yzlpa dzziav do~s : 
 
 W/ieFff ~ ItOLtfft) XfJLt ~t/9 ~(>0(Tl)Mz.T. 
 
 When lolaus saw Copreus coming, he called to the children, 
 (vs. 4-8f.): oj rtxva Ti'/vr/, oeofiOj Xa}j.dvefff? t//)v | Trt/rAwv It is evident 
 that they then took their seat at the altar. Cf- 61 : 
 
 oo d^r^ j i~z{ ;j.oi fttu/Jio<i fJ.fr/.i(Tei Ozob. 
 
 At v. 344. lolaus asserts that they will remain at this altar. 
 We may believe, therefore, that, when they extended hands to 
 the choreutae, they rose from their seats and approached the 
 choreutae who were standing near them. 
 
 Supplices 
 
 At v. 10 the chorus are surrounding ^Ethra as suppliants : 
 ixT^fit OoJJ.uj -finffiriTwuti t//..*v yo<;o. If, at this time, 
 the chorus are on the stage, they remain there supplies (Eurip.) 
 till v. 359, or during more than one-fourth of the 
 play. Cf. 359f. : a// 1 tit ^/>r), aiiw dyainzi-z fs-i^ \>j.rjTf><>$. On this 
 assumption, they sang the long ode (42-86) on the stage. At 
 no place is mention made of their descending into the orchestra. 
 At v. 279 the are evidentl near to Theseus. Cf. 277f.: 
 
 At v. 81 Iff. Adrastus orders the bodies of the slain to be 
 
112 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 brought in. At v. 815ff. the chorus, who are the mothers of the 
 dead, ask that the bodies of the children be placed in their arms, 
 and their request is granted. 1 
 
 At v. 941 Adrastus orders the mothers to draw nigh to their 
 children; this Theseus opposes (942if.), and Adrastus then 
 promises the mothers that they shall at last receive the bones 
 
 of their SOns: orv 8s -nvafts -/toffftw/jisy -u/>{, I tiff TO. XftoffriZefftf (948f.). 
 
 These bones they see brought in at v. 1114f., and receive them 
 from the boy that brings them : <f>ii>\ "!>?} >>.<i.r>r^ b-opd/M tr-odov 
 (1160). 
 
 At the close of the pla}~, v. 1232, the chorus say, <rrsi%t!).s\> 
 "Adpafftf, and with those words chorus and actors leave the the- 
 atre together. 
 
 Hecuba 
 
 Hecuba enters with the chorus saying (59ff.)r 
 
 W^cT^, O> KGLtd$) ~ij\> yftfJL"')'; ~f>u dofJLWVj 
 Hecuba wz~ di&ovffat r> 6J.6dou)iov 
 
 Hecuba, thus, enters the orchestra, and it was entirely appro- 
 priate that she who was a captive should appear in the imme- 
 diate company of the chorus, who were composed of captive 
 women. 
 
 Talthybius enters at v. 484, and addresses the chorus ask- 
 ing where he may find Hecuba. The chorus reply that she is 
 lying on the ground near him : ".''>-f l -DM$ <run vwr 1 s^mid I-} %fam 
 (486). If Talthybius had entered on the stage, on which 
 Hecuba was lying, he must certainly have seen her, and his 
 question to the chorus would have been superfluous. Assum- 
 ing that he entered the orchestra, we can easily believe that 
 Hecuba, as she lay on the ground, was for the moment hidden 
 from his view by the members of the chorus. 
 
 The chorus deliberate entering the tent : fanteatf s-^-cVw//^; 
 (1042), but the appearance of Hecuba makes it unnecessarj' for 
 them to do so. 
 
 1 Cf. Capps, p. 44f. 
 
THI-: STAGI-; 113 
 
 Atv. 1056 Polymnestor comes forth blinded and maddened. 
 Hecuba has previously (1054f.) expressed her intention of flee- 
 ing from him. It would, however, seem to be a difficult task 
 to find a safe retreat from a maddened man on a small stage. 
 Polymnestor wanders in all directions (1056ff.), till, finally, he 
 hears the concealed steps of the women of the chorus : ( x<j-Ta> 
 p<j.(>>.<; ai(7fh>.',<>!w.>. -fiws yuwixaw 1070f.). He is now in the orches- 
 tra, though no mention has been made of his descending a flight 
 of steps, which, in fact, would not be an easy task for a blind 
 and enraged man. The evident explanation is that when Hec- 
 uba fled from Polymnestor she withdrew to a remote part of 
 the orchestra. Thechorusalso fled from Polymnestor, and aft- 
 er he had roamed over all parts of the orchestra, he came upon 
 them (1070), as they were treading with muffled step. 
 
 At the close of the play, all leave the orchestra together. 
 Agamemnon says (1288f.): 
 
 ' and the chorus reply, 
 
 VS. 1293ff.I :'T -<>o$ /!/*>? ffxr^tis re, <ftiai, 
 
 ~(t)v dsfficoffuvutv iteipaffottevat I uoyftotv* 
 
 i ' | * A 
 
 Hercules Furens 
 
 The chorus are near enough to the children of Hercules to 
 notice that the color of their eyes resembles that 
 of their father's (130ff. ) . The chorus will defend Hercules Karens 
 the children (261f.). We tnaj , therefore, believe 
 that the chorus were near to the children. 
 
 When Hercules arrives, he finds his children in the midst of 
 a crowd of men: <'>y}^<> h vo/>w> (527), and he states his intention 
 of drawing nigh to them (529). As, before this, no mention has 
 been made of a crowd of men, we may believe that Hercules 
 found his children close by the chorus. 
 
 At v. 747f. the chorus say : 
 
 At v. 761 they express their intention to withdraw, and at 
 v. 763 they begin a choral ode. It is evident, therefore, that the 
 chorus did not mount the stage, for, on that assumption, we 
 should be obliged to think either that the time of speaking a 
 
114 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 single verse was all that they required for passing from the 
 stage to their positions in the orchestra, or else that they began 
 the choral ode before reaching the orchestra. Either of these 
 suppositions is improbable. The chorus, then, merely moved 
 toward the wall of tne proscenium. There is no evidence that 
 they saw what was taking place within the house. 
 
 At v. 1031 the chorus have again approached the house, and 
 this time they see many things that are within it. Amphitryon 
 orders them to withdraw, that Hercules ma3 r continue sleeping 
 ( 1042ff . ) ; he tells them to withdraw still further ( 1 047ff. ) . This 
 they do, and are no longer able to see what is within thehouse, 
 for, while at v. 1034 they notice that Hercules is sleeping, after 
 withdrawing from the house they say to Amphitryon (1060) 
 
 Ion 
 
 Creusa calls the chorus her faithful servants: (dou^.sufj.a -urrovj 
 
 748). The chorus declare to Creusa that they 
 
 ion desire to share her fate (857f.). With such sym- 
 
 pathy existing between Creusa and the chorus, 
 
 we may believe that they were not separated in position. 
 
 Ion says to the chorus, v. 510: -^'x^-o^n ywaixes, ai rdtwY d<>.- 
 <P\ tpymdas ddiJMtv; We may believe, therefore, that the chorus 
 were stationed near to the temple. 
 
 The chorus (219if.) ask Ion whether it is permitted them 
 to enter the temple. At v. 222 he replies that it is not, but in 
 vs. 226if. tells them the conditions of sacrifice upon which they 
 may enter. We may, therefore, infer that their entering would 
 have been neither difficult nor unexpected. 
 
 The entrance of Creusa and the Pedagogue, at v. 725, was 
 evidently by a parodos. They begin speaking at v. 725, and 
 have not approached near enough to the chorus to address them 
 till v. 747. No stage would have been large enough to allow 
 so extended a conversation, while they were walking from one 
 side to the center of it. 1 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 282. 
 
THE STAGE 115 
 
 Troades 
 The chorus came from the tent in the background. Cf. 
 
 176f. : <>'-' ,'*"'. ~ft<ifJ.zfifJ. f!7.~rpil.^ l).'.ir; 
 
 ~f/.(7o * Aya/Jid/Jivovoy "/.. T. /. 
 
 Talthybius states (296i.) his intention of lead- Troades 
 
 ing away the captive women : 
 
 eiTOi ~fjt.^ elA.TiYi*.lvck<s 
 
 xi >\ ~l<7'.'; t/././.n'.^ O.t%fl.aA(OTidt0V uym. 
 
 In vs. 1266ff. he commands them to go to the ships : 
 
 v rra:occ. (><i>titw <',rav 
 
 At v. 1269 he commands Hecuba also to go : 
 
 ft'') r ? OJ ~i'Z<xi.'.(l. dlHTTU%ffTdTTj ]'>)'/'/.:. 
 
 These orders are obeyed and chorus and actors leave together. 
 
 Cf. 1331f. I '('> ~< I-/*' !.'.';< I. ~o/>'.^' (>!>.<t>^ ok 
 
 -<x'>(f2[>z -oda ffu'; i~\ -/.(/.-a^ \\y<i.'.wv. 
 
 Helena 
 The chorus at v. 327 state their desire to go into the palace 
 
 "with Helen : Oi'/.u> uk -/.ayoj ft<>\ an*^>.r>z)Jt^ <]<>!>.^, 
 
 Helen in reph^, vs. 330f., calls the chorus her Helena 
 
 friends, and bids them enter the house: /Jars ^drs 
 o > oo'i.uos. After the close of this dialogue (385), neither cho- 
 rus nor Helen appears again till the chorus speaks at v. 515 
 saying: yzuuffa r^ Usv-uptiw) -/.<'> t>^, Helen says, v. 528f.: 
 
 IfS* d.n ~('/.(f<> Tttud l'.^ sdf)ty yQ} 7TAtV 
 
 f7-i ! .-/<.i>, >i.(/.ih^>fT(/. ^iovo^c e{/j>u /J'>YO>)^. It is clear, 
 therefore, that Helen and the chorus enter the palace in com- 
 pany. 
 
 In another passage, the chorus and an actor are very near 
 each other. At v. 1628, Theoclymenus bids the chorus stand 
 aside. They then refuse to let go his garments (1629). He or- 
 ders them to let him go (1631). This they refuse to do (1631 ). 
 Finally they say to him, (vs. 1639f.): arses' ffi 
 
 a/.A IV' 
 
116 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 Iphigenia in Tauris 
 Iphigenia calls the chorus her attendants (-/^IT-O/O^V, 63), 
 
 fyjLwat (143), dearest women, ((piXrarat yuvauss, 
 
 iph. inTaur. 1056). She beseeches them to keep her plans 
 
 secret. Cf. 1068ff.: 
 
 icpoq ffe ds;:ta$ y 
 
 Her she beseeches the members of the 
 chorus individually, even grasping them by the knees. 
 
 At v. 342 Iphigenia orders the strangers brought in. The 
 chorus first see them coming (456f.); and at v. 468 Iphigenia 
 orders the chorus to release them from their bonds : //^VSTS ~&v 
 
 At v. 470 Iphigenia orders the chorus to go within the 
 temple, and make ready the sacrifice : v?> o erroj ffTsfyiivrss '*>-/>*- 
 TTf'Csrs, and a similar command is given at v. 1079 : <ro\> /^v y>// 
 xai ffov elfffiatvetv dofj.ous' 
 
 At v. 636 Iphigenia says that she is going into the temple, 
 and calls upon the chorus to guard the strangers : fFu/0vrsr' <w- 
 Tow?, -xpoff-xohn, dsff^cov arsp (638). Thechorus could hardly guard 
 those that they were not near to, and especially, as is specified 
 here, when the ones to be guarded were without bonds. 
 
 At vs. 159f. Iphigenia is about to pour the libation. The 
 chorus join in this libation with an ode (179ff.). We can hard- 
 ly believe that at this time chorus and actor are separated. 
 Iphigenia has already (61fT.) stated her intention of offering the 
 libation in company with the chorus. 
 
 When Thoas enters (1152), he addresses the chorus asking 
 where he can find Iphigenia. She is herself present, and the cho- 
 rus so inform him: y?' iTrj'y, r] .' -<'^-" aW4r f l/tsr ffapws (1156). It 
 seems improbable that Thoas here entered on a stage, and asked 
 the whereabouts of a person who was close beside him. On the 
 assumption that he entered the orchestra, his failure to see one 
 among so many persons was entirely natural. 
 
THE STAGE 117 
 
 Electra 
 
 Electra returns from the spring at v. 112. Orestes is pres- 
 ent, yet he is not discovered by his sister till v. 
 215. Orestes has seen Electra's approach, but Electra 
 
 has made no effort to conceal himself (107ff.) It 
 is evident, then, that the entrance of Electra was not upon a 
 stage. During the time of singing the ode (112-166), we may 
 believe that Electra was slowly advancing over the parodos, 
 and through the orchestra. At v. 167 she meets the chorus, 
 who are coming in over the opposite parodos. They then re- 
 turn together conversing, and slowly approach the house, in 
 front of which at v. 215 they discover Orestes sitting. Electra 
 then suggests to the chorus that they flee, she into the house, 
 they over the road way. 1 On their return together, Electra and 
 the chorus are so near each other that she asks them to look at 
 her locks, and her ragged garments : 
 
 fi~/.i<l'<i.i tt.tiu Htvapav XO/JLOLV 
 
 /.at ~f>''>'/ r i ~ f i^ c/'-ftJ 1 ' ~c~/wv. (184f.) 
 
 At the entrance of Clytemnestra on her chariot (988), the 
 chorus first address her, as was natural on the assumption that 
 she entered the orchestra. At v. 1004 Electra comes forward 
 and offers to help her mother alight. 
 
 Orestes 
 
 On their entrance, the chorus approach near to the palace 
 in front of which Orestes is lying asleep. Electra 
 (136ff.) addressing them as dearest women (^t'x- Orestes 
 
 rarac ywaixs?) bids them proceed with gentle step, 
 lest they awake Orestes. The chorus promise quiet, (144). 
 They are so near to Orestes at v. 173 that they notice that he 
 is sleeping, (^-vaWcO. Electra has already ordered them to 
 withdraw (170), and at v. 180 she again orders them to retire 
 from his couch. This time they obey, and at vs. 208f. they request 
 Electra to draw nigh to the couch, in order to see whether her 
 brother still lives. Although this scene could have been acted 
 with a stage five feet in height, with a stage of the Vitruvian 
 
 1 Cf. Capps, p. 21. 
 
118 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 height the chorus could not have approached near enough to 
 Orestes to see that he was sleeping. 
 
 At v. 356 Menelaus enters, and at vs. 375ff. asks thechoru^ 
 where Orestes is. The latter is present, and replies (380ff.) to 
 the words of Menelaus. At v. 470 Tyndareus enters, and in- 
 quires of the chorus where he can find his son-in-law, Menelaus. 
 The latter is present and replies to the words of Tyndareus. If, 
 in the former instance, the claim should be made that Menelaus 
 asked the chorus for the information he desired, because, al- 
 though he saw Orestes, he did not recognize him (cf. 377ff.), the 
 claim could hardly be made, in the latter instance, that Tyn- 
 dareus failed to recognize his son-in-law. The true explana- 
 tion doubtless is that, as the chorus are the first to see the in- 
 coming actors (cf. 348, 456ff.), so, on arriving, the actors see 
 the chorus before seeing other actors present, which would have 
 been possible only on condition of their entering the orchestra. 
 In the case of Menelaus, that he came into the immediate pres- 
 ence of the chorus, is still further shown by his command to 
 them to conduct him to his son, ay"^ i>^ (474). 
 
 Electra arranges the chorus in two divisions. Cf. 1251f.: 
 ffrijJP <i.'. >>.kv f)t).a)v to*s$ (iiiMziffWi TpifftWj 
 
 </.'. SVvfltO Gt/AOV OttJ.OV '.< (CIHHJftfW OOfLUlV, 
 
 The arrangement of the chorus here was, no doubt, that one 
 division stood at the entrance of one parodos, the other at the 
 entrance of the other. As they were to be a guard to the house, 
 we may believe that the house w r as on the level on which they 
 were standing. 
 
 For the exciting scene, during the course of which Orestes 
 threatens to kill Hermione, there was not room on thedistegia. 
 Orestes says (1578): 
 
 t).l/j,u> ~/.-avzlv (Too Bu^OLf^p . st ffouXst /JLttfts'tv, 
 
 Menelaus had already said (1573ff.): 
 
 ' 5 A.afj.itd3wv 6{>a> ffl^Ctf. 
 
 axpetv Tofrfffa 
 
THE STAGE 119 
 
 Phcenissae 
 
 When the chorus prostrate themselves before Polvnices, we 
 may believe that he was in the orchestra near 
 them. Cf. 291ff.: 
 
 The chorus (296ff.) summon Jocasta from the house, that she 
 may embrace her son. Jocasta comes forth at v. 301 and be- 
 gins addressing the chorus, not catching sight of her son till she 
 has spoken three verses. Cf. 304ff.: 
 
 Iphigenia in Aulis 
 
 Ch r temnestra enters on her chariot at v. 607. After thank- 
 ing the chorus for their words of welcome 1 she 
 speaks as follows (610-618): iph. in Aulis 
 
 d/J? Ojfrjfj.fi-w; 
 k'zd) Ttosbsiy '/c <S*to> (ftrsd^ '/-<' >r 
 
 fft) O ? (D ~'/.';0'; ;!.<i'. } /i 
 
 dffpov ~'.^t\f><i. '/.w/.d'/ ^ 
 "//.sTc nk ';zd*;'.oif >';> d 
 til's afrits '/-a\ -utts'xTar i!~ fr/r^w.- 
 
 ffdxooy disijVTjS iu$ d-; ixJiiit 
 These words were spoken to the chorus ; and the\ r would have 
 been meaningless, unless Clytemnestra had been in the orches- 
 tra at the time of speaking them. Crytemnestra next greets 
 Agamemnon (633f.); Iphigenia does likewise (cf. 635if.). 2 We 
 may, therefore, infer that Agamemnon also was in the orchestra. 
 At vs. 11 If. the Presbeus is ordered by Agamemnon to go 
 to Argos with a letter. The command is repeated at v. 139, 
 
 1 The verses of the chorus spoken in welcome to the approaching Clytemnestra 
 (598-606) are bracketed in the Nauck edition, as well as vs. 619-632 which fnclude part 
 of Clytemnestra's opening speech, and the words of Iphigenia stating her desire to go 
 to greet her father. 2 These verses also are bracketed in the Nauck edition. 
 
120 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 when the Freshens replies (140), (T-SOOM, $iw./.d. Then follows a 
 conversation between Agamemnon and the Freshens (141-161), 
 in which the former gives parting instructions, and the latter 
 assents to the former's injunctions. During this conversation 
 the two were doubtless moving slowly aw r ay ; but it would 
 have been impossible to consume the time of speaking (twenty- 
 two verses) while walking from the center to the side of the 
 stage. Agamemnon and his deputy, then, as they spoke these 
 verses, were moving slowly down the parodos. 
 
 Bacchae 
 
 The sympathy existing between Dionysus and the choreutae 
 
 would lead us to believe that they were not sep- 
 
 Bacchze arated in position. When Dionysus is away 
 
 from them, they call him to come into their band 
 
 (582ff.), and when he comes, they express their desolateness in 
 
 his absence (609), and call him their guardian (614). 
 
 The play opens with a speech by Dionysus. At vs. 58ff. the 
 god bids the chorus take their drums, and beat them around 
 the palace of Pentheus. This order would imply that the pal- 
 ace was within easy reach of the chorus while standing in their 
 usual position. Dionysus says (56f.) that he brought the women 
 of the chorus as his assistants and companions. We may infer, 
 therefore, that at the opening of the play Dionysus marched in- 
 to the orchestra followed by the chorus. 
 
 The entrance of Pentheus at v. 215 was into the orchestra. 
 After entering he speaks for thirty-three verses (215-247), and 
 then exclaims (248f.) : '/~/ y ~ ( >" **" -'/^ }//-"- Tzifisffiuv o/>*. 
 
 Had Pentheus entered on a stage on which were Cadmus and 
 Teiresias, the latter could not have escaped the attention of 
 Pentheus, while he was speaking thirty-three verses. 
 
 Agave was in the close company of the chorus during her 
 conversation with them (1168-1201). The chorus call her a 
 fellow-reveler (1172) ; presenting the head of the lion she bids 
 them (1184) partake of the feast ; The chorus comment on the 
 hair on the head in the hands of Agave (1188). 
 
 At vs. 974ff. Dionysus states his intention of leading Pen- 
 theus to the mountains. It is probable that their exit was by 
 
THE STAGE 121 
 
 the parodos, for the choral ode that follows (977-1023) is but a 
 farewell to Dionysus and Pentheus, the final words of which 
 
 are : l'ti\ < 
 
 On the assumption that Dionysus and Pentheus made their ex- 
 it from the stage, by a side door, they were out of the theatre, 
 before the ode was hardty more than begun; but considering 
 that they made their exit from the orchestra, the spectacle in 
 which two men were going forth, one to obtain his vindica- 
 tion, the other to meet his death, while the chorus looking at 
 their slowly retreating figures sang to them a parting ode, and, 
 when, at last, they were well nigh out of hearing, uttered a 
 final hope of the success of Dionysus, was an extremely express- 
 ive one. 
 
 At the close of the play, Agave bids her home and city fare- 
 well (1368f.); she bids her father farewell (1379), and then says 
 to the chorus: V- ( ' } -,'*-! vs (1381). The chorus sing a final 
 ode (1388-1392), and we may believe that then chorus and act- 
 ors leave the theatre together. 
 
 Rhesus 
 
 The chorus act as a guard to the tent of Hector. (Cf. vs. 
 15, 524-, 813). Their proper position, then, W T as 
 near to the tent. At the opening of the pla\- Rhesus 
 
 they go to the tent (Iff.), to which they announce 
 (50) that they have come as a messenger. 
 
 At vs. 523f. Hector orders the chorus to go a little forward 
 to keep guard. When the charioteer of Rhesus approaches, the}' 
 think (730) that perchance 'some one falls into the net.' It 
 would appear, then, that the charioteer was coming directly 
 tow r ard the place w^here the chorus were standing. 
 
 The chorus on re-entering (674) encounter Ulysses, and cry 
 (675f.): ,5v//t, ,irtis, ,5'tis, ,3 fits, 
 
 u&s, (>^s- r:V <"''>" v?j/' : Ulyses replies 
 (683): 0>;f /'"/' f!-i t n.tin^ oix'i.<7<i.i 7.<i.7.w^ . The chorus 
 continue their threat (684): 
 
 any. zjtsls zu\tftijfj.a. Myyijv ~<>\v n'.fi. trc^ftvwv (wXs.lv ; 
 
122 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 When Ulysses finally gives the watchword, the chorus with- 
 draw with the words (688): e,ua#v I'v/s -a? Mpu. At v. 877 Hec- 
 tor commands the chorus to seize the charioteer, and conduct 
 him within the tent. During these two scenes it can hardly be 
 claimed that chorus and actors were on different levels. 
 
 At the close of the play, Hector says to the chorus (986f.)r 
 
 avto^fyz Arjft(i7>y r' aw^vaf ^uvwptdwv, The chorus re- 
 
 spond 993f.): ~siftou fiafT'.Asf' rtrziyu) ;>.<; <>-/.<>t$ 
 
 xoffpi]ffd/j.evw -/.at zufjLjjLazfa /.. r. /.; and, with the clos- 
 ing words of the chorus, we may believe that actors and chorus 
 leave the theatre together. 
 
 Cyclops 
 
 The cave of the Cyclops is in the background. The chorus 
 enter attended by servants who drive the flocks 
 Cyclops (36ff.). Silenus orders the chorus to bid the ser- 
 
 vants drive the flocks into the cave. Cf. 821.: 
 
 -o{rwa$ afy(nriffat icpo<nc6A.ou$ xeJ.euffa.TS. 
 The chorus do as ordered. Cf. 84: 
 
 %ti>peiT . drap drj rA>, -arsft^ fficaudijv ^/cCs"; 
 
 Whether these flocks appeared as real goats or as men assuming 
 the guise of goats, we have no means of knowing; but it is evi- 
 dent that they actually entered the cave from the orchestra. 
 We can hardly believe that they scrambled up a flight of steps, 
 in order to reach this cave. 
 
 The chorus tell Ulysses (471) that they desire to aid him in 
 subduing the Cyclops. They ask themselves (483ff.) who will 
 be the first to lay hold of the brand that is to put out the Cy- 
 clops' eye. Ulysses urges them to aid him (590ff.). He tells 
 them to seize the brand, and enter the cave (630f.) They again 
 say that they wish to share in the task of subduing the mon- 
 ster (632ff.) At last, they begin to find reasons why they can 
 not join in the work. Some are standing too far away from the 
 portals (635O; others have just become lame (637); others also 
 are lame (638f.); the eyes of others are filled with ashes (640f.); 
 but it is noticeable that none of them urge the difficulty of climb- 
 ing steps, which would have been a natural reason to urge, if 
 
THE STAGE 123 
 
 there had been any steps to climb, especially for those that had 
 just become lame. The true reason for the failure of the cho- 
 orus to enter the cave may probably be ascribed to the poet's 
 desire to make a display of their ridiculous cowardice. 1 
 
 Ulysses must have been in the close company of the chorus, 
 when he threatened to strike them. Cf. 210f.: 
 
 ddxpua 
 
 At the close of the play, it is probable that chorus and actors 
 left the theatre together. At vs. 441f. Ulysses tells the chorus 
 that he has a plan for their escape from slavery; at vs. TOlff. 
 he says that he will go to the shore to launch his ship ; and, in 
 the closing words of the play (708f.), the chorus speak of them- 
 selves as the fellow-voyagers of Ulysses. 
 
 ARISTOPHANES Acharnians 
 
 At the opening of the play is represented an assembly on the 
 Pnyx. Dicasopolis says (20ff.) that, although 
 the Pnyx is then empty, when the Prytanes ar- Acharnians 
 
 rive they will jostle each other for the first seats, 
 rushing down in a body. The Prytanes enter at v. 40, and, as 
 Dicaeopolis had prophesied they \vould do, they crowd for the 
 first seats (42). At v. 91 Pseudartabas arrives, and with his 
 attendants he withdraws at v. 122. A tfr/mro? 'Odopdyrutv enters 
 at v. 156. There were present, also, others, Ixxfyfftav (56). The 
 assembly is called to order by the herald (43), and is dismissed 
 by him (172f.). For this scene, which was made to resemble a 
 regular assembly on the Pnyx, it seems hardly possible that 
 there was room on the stage. 
 
 The chorus w r ere very near to Dicasopolis when, as he was 
 going forth to celebrate the rural Dionysia, they meet him, and 
 cr (280ff.): 
 
 <>o /Sa/cF?, on /3/cFf; 
 
 He fears that they may break the pitcher that he carries, (cf. 
 284): '' H/tdxists, ryrj rj' iffrt- ry/ %u?pa. ffuvrptysrs, but they reply at 
 
 1 Capps, p. 42. 
 
124 THE ATTIC STAGE OP THE FIFTH CENTURl 
 
 v. 285 that it is not the pitcher, but he, that they will harm : 
 
 ffs rj.ev ouv ndTftXeifffofisv. (I) iLtaftd 7.i(paAr t . 
 
 The chorus were at another time near enough to Dicaeopolis 
 to threaten him with personal violence. Cf. 564f.: 
 
 ttOTy (TO -ot #?9, <>'> /j'-=v?9 ; <i>? i Osysls 
 
 TOV dvdpa. TO>TOV avroy dpftrjffei rdya. 
 
 When Dicaeopolis is to make trial of his skill in speaking, the 
 chorus order him to bring the chopping block from the house, 
 adding (365) : 
 
 Oz\$ dibfH) Touittzrjvov i'f'^st/t-t /.lye'.';. 
 
 When he brings the chopping block, he says (366) : 
 
 Idou BloLfffLt. TO fjLev litti]vov To3i m 
 
 We may infer, therefore, that he brought the block near to 
 the chorus, and, standing on it, make his speech. 
 At the close of the play, Dicasopolis says (1231) : 
 
 %ns<i$i vuv (jtdovref <u -i^~.)J. 
 The chorus reply (1232ff.): 
 
 and, with these words, we may believe that chorus and actors 
 leave the orchestra together. 
 
 Knigh is 
 In several instances in this play, chorus and actors are 
 
 brought into close relations with one another. 
 Knights At v. 244 Demosthenes urges the sausage-seller 
 
 to resist the Paphlagonian, adding, by way of 
 encouragement to the sausage-seller, that the chorus are near. 
 The chorus enter at v. 247. Their first words are: -ais -aiz rv 
 xaywjfyoy, and then they also strike him. Cf. 251f. : 
 
 The Paphylagonian then turns to the audience, and exclaims 
 
 (257)1 <''>$ ' ; ~ a&Sfttuv ~'>~<>t>.a'. E >)'; ID ;>.<>- wv . 
 
 The chorus then (258ff.) defends itself for making the attack. 
 
 Again the chorus strike the Paphlagonian. At v. 451 they 
 cry: -r' vfy>x>, to v^hich he replies (451f.): w, j'?\ | ->>--ti<ti <i. 
 
 ii[ ^tJVOt/JLOTOLt. 
 
 At the close of v. 491 the chorus hand a flask of oil to the 
 
THE STAGE 125 
 
 Sausage-seller, and, at the close of v. 493 they hand him a head 
 of garlic. At the close of v. 922, they hand to Cleon a ladle. 
 
 Clouds 
 
 At Y. 1490 Xanthias is on the roof of the phrontisterion. 
 At Y. 1494 Strepsiades also is on the roof. On 
 being asked what he is doing there, the latter clouds 
 
 replies (1495f.) that he is chopping logic with 
 the beams of the house; and he declares at Y. 1503 that he is 
 walking on air, and speculating about the sun. It will be 
 readily admitted that, for the free movements incidental to a 
 scene such as this, the roof of the proscenium was more suited 
 than was a distegia only three feet deep. 
 
 The closing words of the play are by the chorus : r t fei<stf eor 
 
 xsy<>(>su-at -fdp /JLSTftiius TO ys r^fj.epo'; fjfj.iv (1510), and, with these 
 
 words, it is probable that all march from the theatre together 
 with the actors leading the way. 
 
 Wasps 
 
 There is an extensive use of the distegia in this play . The 
 house of Philocleon is represented in the back- 
 ground. At the opening of the play, Bdelycleon wasps 
 is on the roof; at v. 143 a rumbling in the chim- 
 ney tells him that Philocleon is trying to reach thereof; the son 
 drives back his father (147f.); at v. 207 the latter appears on 
 the roof. The chorus enter at v. 230, along a city street (cf. 
 246). ! The conversation that follows, in which Philocleon 
 and the chorus take part, was evidently carried on in front of 
 the house of the former. If, at this time, the chorus were in the 
 orchestra, and Philocleon was on the traditional distegia, he 
 was on a level about twenty feet above that of the choreutas. 2 
 The scene becomes morenatural if we assume that, at this time, 
 Philocleon was on the roof of the proscenium. 
 
 The chorus at v. 383 promise Philocleon that they will de- 
 fend him. He reminds them of their promise (402) when Bdely- 
 cleon attempts to prevent his escape. They prepare to abide 
 by their promise. Cf. 423: 
 
 1 Cf. Pickard, p. 292. 2 Cf. White, p. 193. 
 
 TJHIVBESIT 
 
126 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 They again threaten Bdclycleon. Cf. 437: 
 
 They finally rush against Bdelycleon, and he exclaims (456): 
 
 -alt -al\ Co av#ta, -<iu$ (Ttp^xas a~u rjjf oizta?, 
 
 The Wasps are beaten back and Xanthias says (460): 
 
 Up i[j.l)*M)tj.i'/ Tro//" 6ju.af a~ufro(jirjfr r .v rw yjH'rsa) 
 
 At the close of the play, chorus and actors leave the orches 
 tra together, the former dancing. Cf. 1535ff.: 
 
 //* trw^er', e? TJ ^ft/err' dp%<>t)fj.sv<>t Oijf>a"=: 
 
 Peace 
 At v. 80 Tyrgasus mounts a beetle, and, after a journey 
 
 through the air, reaches heaven. Finding that 
 Peace the goddess, Peace, has been cast into a cave 
 
 (W/yov pfM, 223), he calls upon all to aid him in 
 drawing her out (296ff.). At once the chorus appear. At 490 
 ff. Hermes, Tyrgasus, and the chorus all lay hold of the rope, 
 and draw Peace forth. It is evident that chorus and actors are to- 
 gether in this scene, for ( 1 ) the chorus are told by Ty rgasus ( 309ff. ) 
 to be quiet lest they disturb Polemos, who is in the palace, and 
 (2) when Hermes grants permission to thechorus to drag away 
 the stones that covered Peace, he tells them to go within the 
 cave. Cf. 427: siffwvrss w$ rdyw-a rm>$ xcV/oo? ^/x=^c. Finally, it 
 would have ruined the illusion, if Tyrgseus and Hermes had been 
 in heaven pulling on the rope, while the chorus were on the 
 earth pulling on the same rope. The traditional view must as- 
 sume that Tyrgaeus ascended to the distegia above the stage, 
 and that the chorus climbed first to the stage, and then to the 
 distegia. This would, however, seem to have been impossible. 
 The probable explanation is that Tyrgaeus ascended to the roof 
 of the proscenium, and that on this level the chorus entered, re- 
 maining there till Peace had been drawn from the cave, and 
 then withdrawing, and appearing in the orchestra. There may 
 remain the objection that too many may have thus appeared 
 on the roof of the proscenium, but this objection applies still 
 more forcibly to the view that would hold that so many 
 appeared on the traditional distegia ; and it is noticeable, fur- 
 
THE STAGE 127 
 
 ther, that during this scene there is no song by the cnorus that 
 would require dancing. 1 
 
 Tyrgaeus declares (881f.) that he will lead Theoria among 
 the spectators; and he apparently does this. Cf. 905f.: 
 
 //' at xftrjrdvzts, dfysfftts ry/ (-hinftia^, 
 Oiad w<$ icpo&ufjui)? o -ftnrw^ -aftso^aru. 
 
 The chorus are opposed to the offering of an ox (926), lest it 
 should be necessary that they render assistance. Tyrgaeus, 
 then, was making his sacrifice in the orchestra. This fact is 
 further made clear by his suggestion (962): xa\ rms Osara^ /n^re 
 raw zptftajv. It would not have been easy to throw barley to the 
 spectators from a position so far away from them as was the 
 stage. 
 
 At the close of the play, actors and chorus leave the theatre 
 together. Tyrgaeus (1316ff.) orders the bride to be brought 
 forth that all may join in the rejoicing, and dance in her honor. 
 She comes forth at v. 1329. The chorus wish to escort the 
 bridegroom also (1339ff.); and the chorus speak the final words 
 of the play (1354ff.): 
 
 Birds 
 
 The scenery represented in this play is a hillside and a cav- 
 ern (cf. 54, 92, 202, 207). The path over which 
 Euelpides enters is one with rocks without a Birds 
 
 beaten track (20ff.). This scenery was unsuited 
 to a stage. 
 
 Euelpides and Pisthetairus, at the opening of the play, are 
 entering engaged in conversation. They do not reach the house 
 of the Epops till v. 54. It is evident that they could not have 
 occupied the time of speaking fifty-three verses in walking half 
 way across the stage. 
 
 When the chorus see the two strangers present, they medi- 
 tate attacking them. Cf. 344 : 
 
 1 Capps, p. 75f. 
 
128 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 They express in strong words their intention of attacking them 
 Of. 364f.: 
 
 In the meantime, the strangers deliberate on their condition. 
 Euelpides asks where he can flee, that he may not be torn to 
 pieces (354), and his comrade advises that they remain and 
 fight (357). Finally, the chorus withdraw (400). It is evi- 
 dent that, in this scene, chorus and actors were together. 
 
 When the messenger enters (1122), he asks where Pisthe- 
 tairus is. The latter is present and replies, obroffi (1123). If 
 the two actors had been on the stage, the question of the mes- 
 senger would have been unnatural. 
 
 When Pisthetairus and Basileia are seen by the chorus to 
 be approaching, the latter move aside to make way for them. 
 
 Cf. 1720ff. W r c dts%s t 7r>7~ 
 
 fj.xafH ffv ~'>/. 
 
 At the conclusion of the play, the chorus following the act 
 ors leave the theatre. Cf. 1755if. : 
 
 Lysistrata 
 The chorus of men enter at v. 254 carrying billets of wood, 
 
 and pans of charcoal. They express their inten- 
 Lysistrata tion ( 31.0ff. ) of setting fire to the house, if the wo- 
 
 men do not allow them to enter. It cannot be 
 doubted that, with their preparations to burn the house, they 
 move forward toward it. The chorus of women come from the 
 citadel to defend it at v. 319. They perform now the part of act- 
 ors; their place therefore, was on the stage, if there was a 
 stage. It is evident, however, that in their encounter with the 
 chorus of men they were very near to those men. The chorus 
 of men threaten to break their cudgels in beating the women 
 (357) ; the women threaten to beat the men (364) ; the men will 
 burn the hair of the women (381). The women drench the men 
 with water (cf. 381ff.). The women, therefore, at this time, 
 
THE STA<;i- 129 
 
 were in the orchestra, and that they went directly to this place, 
 on their entrance from the citadel, is clear from the fact that 
 two verses after their entrance, orchestral movements began ; 
 but there would not have been time, while they were speaking 
 two verses, for them to descend a flight of steps, and arrange 
 themselves in the orchestra. 1 
 
 Lysistrata (1182ff. ) invites the two choruses into the cita- 
 del. They return at v. 1239, and, with them, come the third 
 chorus, that of the Spartans, and the fourth chorus, that of the 
 Athenians. Lysistrata invites the Spartan and Athenian cho- 
 ruses to lead the way. Cf. 1273if.: 
 
 ayz wv, i-s'^TTf ra/J.a -zrctn^rai xa/o>9, 
 
 These two choruses reply that they will do so (1279ff., 1296ff.), 
 and choruses and actors leave the theatre together. 
 Thesmophoriazusae 
 
 In the first part of the play is represented an assembly scene. 
 Mnesilochus, soon after entering, sacrifices a 
 cake to the goddesses Demeter and Persephone Thesmophoriazusse 
 (284f.), and offers prayers to them (286ff.); he 
 looks for a good seat, that he may hear the orators (292f.). 
 The herald calls the assembly to order : sfxpr^ia V, ey^/ju'w V 
 (295). The chorus offer prayer (312fD. The herald reads the 
 preliminary decree (372ff.). At v. 379 he asks who wishes to 
 speak. A wom,an of the chorus speaks first (383ff.) ; she is fol- 
 lowed by a second woman (443ff.),and by Mnesilochus (466ff.). 
 It is not probable that, in this scene, different parts of the as- 
 sembly were on different levels. 
 
 There are two search scenes in the play, in the course of 
 which the chorus pass over every foot of space where an actor 
 would be likely to be. In the first of these scenes, Clisthenes on 
 entering tells the chorus (574ff.) that a man disguised as a wo- 
 man is present. After some discussion, the chorus declare (597 
 ff.) that they must search for him. After finding Mnesilochus, 
 they decide (655ff.) that they must search to see whether an- 
 other man is concealed among them. They now examine all 
 
 1 Pickard, p. 297. 
 
130 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 places closely, cf. 660: *> dtaaxo-^ (ru-r t rr>r^'; they runabout 
 
 in all directions, cf. 662: // ~ip Tzprn-r^ rfifysiv yjn] <r w$ -ti%t<rT f/fy 
 
 xux^w; they search all parts, cf. 663f.: 
 
 err/ vi I'^sos^ xal fj.dreos ~ayo izdv? 
 
 and, at last, failing to find anybody, they exclaim (687f.): 
 ' 1 anavrd -M$ dceffx<# 
 
 While the women of the chorus are occupied in searching, 
 Mnesilochus (cf. 690f.) snatches a child from the arms of one of 
 them. In their wrath at this offense, they threaten to bring 
 wood and burn the offender to ashes (726f.); they heap up brush- 
 wood beside him (739); and heurgesthem to set it afire (749f). 
 When the child is found to be but a wine-skin filled with wine, 
 the woman from whom it had been taken calls for a bowl, that 
 she may catch the wine (754f.), but Mnesilochus himself drinks 
 the wine (cf. 756). 
 
 Progs 
 In a passage in this play an actor goes among the specta- 
 
 tors. When Dionysus becomes frightened by the 
 Frogs monster that he sees in the lower world (cf. 
 
 286ff.) he deliberates flight, and runs to the priest 
 of Dionysus, with appeals for protection. Cf. 296f.: 
 
 AIO. Trof T' v rta-(>i>i.f J:V. 
 
 ,a;> it : s a) trot c6>//~or^9. 
 Xanthias recalls him (301), dsfyo ^sV, ^ ^^~"~. 
 
 At the close of the play, the chorus escort ^Eschylus from 
 the lower world . Cf . 1 524ff . : 
 
 a$ ^ft^^ yan.a. nnn'Kf 
 
 TOUTOU TOMTOV /.;/c<7r> 
 
 The chorus sing a brief ode, and then actors and chorus make 
 their exit from the theatre together. 
 
THE STAGE 131 
 
 Ecclesiazusae 
 
 During the first two hundred and eighty-four verses of the 
 play, the women of the chorus are not to be dis- 
 tinguished from actors. Some, at least, of them Ecciesiazusse 
 come from a door in the rear (cf. 33if.). At the 
 close of the mimic assembly, these women, with their attendants, 
 form themselves into a chorus, and leave the theatre singing an 
 ode (285if.).i 
 
 The assembly is made to resemble a regular assembly. There 
 are present seats (57, 103), and a ,3/7/>. for the speakers (104) ; 
 the purification is performed (128ff.) ; chaplets are put on (122, 
 131) ; Praxagora asks who wishes to speak (130). 
 
 The chorus return to the theatre at v. 478. Praxagora en- 
 ters at v. 504, and, during the course of an address to the cho- 
 rus, bids them thro w off their cloaks, ^wrttre^aeVa? (507). These 
 cloaks she orders a servant to put in order : xai >>.^T(>I m> >dv \ -ab- 
 r9 xaTsnT(>->? (509f.). We may infer then that Praxagora and 
 the servant entered the orchestra. 
 
 At vs. 1149f. the maidservant says : 
 
 The chorus reply (1151f., 1163ff.): 
 
 a) atfta 
 
 The reply of the Despotes is, -<s>r<> 3 ( ,(o (1166), and, with these 
 words, he leads out the procession that ends the play. 
 
 Plutus 
 
 At v. 253 Cario enters with the chorus of country-people, 
 bound for the house of his master, Chremylus. 
 He urges the choreutae to hasten, n-znntntf (255), piutus 
 
 3^et they do not reach the house of Chremylus 
 till v. 315. That Cario is, in fact, leading in thechorus is made 
 
 1 Cf. Capp, p. 29. 
 
132 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 clear by his command to them, ^s^V (295), and Hxeff&e (308). 
 The long walk over the parodos to the orchestra (253-315), 
 during which Cario and the choreutae are conversing, is easily 
 pictured to the mind. 
 
 The closing scene is one with which we are familiar; all leave 
 the theatre in procession together. Cf. 1208f.: 
 
 ovz ere roj'vuv sr/.o? //tA/ecv ootT f/V-d-?, //' v^w^s?v 
 e/9 ttwrnaftev del faf) xaroxtv TOUTCUV adovra? ?- 
 
 6 EVIDENCE AGAINST A STAGE FROM CERTAIN FACTS CON- 
 NECTED WITH THE ENTRANCE OF ACTORS AND OF CHORUSES 
 
 A consideration of certain facts connected with the entrance 
 of actors, and, in a few instances, of choruses, 
 ^L^orchestra wil1 establish the fact that all actors when not 
 either by a parodos entering from the palace in the background en- 
 fr tered b J the parodos, and will confirm the fact 
 
 already proved, that the palace was in the rear 
 of the orchestra, and on a level with it. 
 
 There will be considered (I) the instances where choruses 
 Four aspects announce in-coming actors; (II) the instances 
 
 of the entrance where actors announce in-coming actors; (III) 
 the instances where actors announce in-coming 
 choruses ; but (IV) the instances where actors come from the 
 palace in the background will be considered last. 
 
 /. Instances where Choruses Announce In-Coming Actors 
 Following are the instances in which choruses announce 
 approaching actors r 1 Persas, 150, 5; 246, 3. 
 Septem, 369, 6. Agam., 493, 10. Ajax, 1042, 
 
 the approach 5 Antig., 155, 7' 376, 3; 526, 5; 626, 5; 1257 
 
 4. Electra (Soph.), 1428, 14. CEd. Tyr., 297, 
 
 1 The first numeral after the name of the play designates the number of the verse 
 at which the chorus state that they see the actor" coming ; the second numeral desig- 
 nates the number of verses that elapse after he is seen, before he begins speaking. Ac- 
 count is taken hereof only those instances in which the choruses say that they see actors 
 approaching, or in some other way indicate that they actually see them. A case, there- 
 fore, like that in the Prometheus where the hero hears lo coming (555), but probably 
 does not see her is not here included. There is omitted, also, the instance where the 
 chorus is vEsch. Septem (861) see Antigone and Ismene coming. One hundred verses 
 elapse after the chorus see them, before they arrive, which is an abnormally large num- 
 ber. Similarly in the other classes there are included only instances where the actors 
 or choruses are spoken of as if actually seen. 
 
THE STAGE 133 
 
 3; 1416, 6. CEd. Col., 549, 2. Philoc., 539,3. Trachin., 178, 
 2; 222, 7; 868, 3; 964, 18. Alcestis, 233, 11; 611, 3; 1006, 2. 
 Medea, 269, 2. Hipp., 899, 3; 1151, 2; 1342, 5. Androm., 
 545, 2; 879, 2. Heracl., 118, 2. Supp. (Eurip.), 980, 10; 1031. 
 3. Hecuba, 216, 2; 724, 2. Here. Fur., 138,2; 442,8. Troades, 
 230, 5; 568, 4; 1118, 5. Iph. in Taur., 236, 2; 456, 17. Elec- 
 tra (Eurip.), 339, 2. Orestes, 348, 8; 456, 14; 850, 2; 1013, 6; 
 1504, 2; 1549, 5. Phoenissae, 443, 3; 1307, 2. Iph. in Aul., 
 591, 7; 1619, 2. Bacch.,1165,3. Rhesus, 85,2; 806, 2. Achar., 
 1069, 2. Thesmo., 571, 3. 
 
 It is found in the above instances that the number of verses 
 that elapse between the time of announcement 
 
 -, , , r . 1 f 1 j Average number 
 
 and that of arrival varies from two to eighteen, O f verses spoken 
 the average number of verses being five (very while actor 
 
 is approaching 
 
 nearly). 
 
 The question necessarily arises, how long a time an actor 
 would have consumed in passing from a door in 
 
 , T . -, Jt -TV , . , The time required 
 
 the side-wing to the center of the stage, which f or walking hair 
 
 way across 
 
 may be considered the position that he would 
 
 i , i i -. i , ,1 
 
 have taken, provided his position was on the 
 stage. The width of the stage in the theatre at Athens was 
 about twenty m., and it may be considered that for an actor to 
 pass over one half of this distance would have taken the time 
 of speaking not more than two verses. 1 
 
 It may be observed, in the first place, that there is every rea- 
 son to believe that the chorus actually saw those 
 that they described as approaching. The verbs 
 here used are the ordinary verbs of seeing, such 
 as o/>, AsbffffM, dgfiofixa, and slno f>fiiu' ffrsfyw occasionally is used. 
 
 If, in these instances, the choruses saw the actors just as 
 they were about to enter on the stage, from a 
 
 . Actors probably 
 
 door in the side-wing, the actor frequently was not just about to 
 in his position at the center of the stage, and enter on the stage 
 
 , f i i t. r At. fr m a d r 
 
 ready for speaking, several verses before the in the side wing 
 chorus finished their announcement of his ap- when first seen 
 
 bv the choruses 
 
 1 If the time of two verses seems not sufficient, as many as four can be allowed. 
 The arguments based upon the former number hold equally good if based upon the lat- 
 ter. Certainly nobody would increase the number beyond four. It is an easy matter 
 for one to make a practical test of the time required to" walk this distance. 
 
134 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 proach. Thus, in the Agamemnon (493) the chorus saw the 
 herald coming ten verses before he began speaking. If, when 
 first announced, he was just setting foot on the stage, he stood 
 still in his position at the center of the stage for eight verses, 
 while the chorus were describing his appearance, and wonder- 
 ing whether he brought joy or sorrow. That such was thecase 
 seems improbable. 
 
 It sometimes happens that between the time of announce- 
 
 ment, and that of arrival, a conversation takes 
 no^ca^redTn 8 P lace that evidently was not carried on in the 
 in the presence presence of the in-coming actor, as e. g. in Soph- 
 
 ocles ' Electra, where the following conversation 
 
 occurs (1428ff.): 
 xauffafffte' /.zbnr-ot yd{> Atyiffdov ix icpodyJLov. 
 
 tp ~Tjji.v tt~tt$ x 
 %u>(>l ysrybax! 
 XO . ftarz xar" a.VTt'S-'Jptov <'KT<>V rdy>.(r~(/. J 
 
 OP. OdjHTst.' r/o'j//v. //,). r t vast? Sitftfl vov. 
 OP. y.a< dr t ft^j/^xa. HA. TwfldfT v ft.l/jn? i~wt, 
 AO. df wro$ av auiid j w^ 7j~iu)<$ cWcTrsjv 
 
 T^V ojdev btj.a)v on x. r. /. 
 
 It is clear that it was not intended that ^gistheus hear a 
 word of this conversation, and that, with their final words, the 
 chorus gather around Electra, lest ^Egistheus, who was at that 
 time near at hand, might hear. Assuming, however, that ^Egis- 
 theus was seen by the chorus just entering on the stage, we 
 shall have to believe that he heard all of the conversation. 
 
 It is evident, then, that the chorus do not see the actor as 
 he is just about to enter on the stage from a door in the side- 
 wing. 
 
THE STAGE 135 
 
 The only place left for the actor when first seen is without 
 the stage-buildings. Bv referring to the plan on 
 
 * . , . ' - j 1 The actor when 
 
 page 91, it is seen that the chorus could have first seen was with- 
 commanded a view of the parodos as far as the out the sta e e - 
 
 11 11 -, . ,1 . buildings 
 
 eye could reach, by standing at or near the posi- 
 tion indicated by the letter W. If the actor had approached the 
 stage from without the stage-buildings, intending to reach the 
 stage through a paraskenion, he could not have been seen by the 
 chorus, after he had approached nearer to the stage-buildings 
 than is the position indicated by the letter P. The time required 
 for passing from the side to the center of the stage is assumed to 
 be that of reciting two verses. The time, then, required for pass- 
 ing from P to the center of the stage would be a little more than 
 that of reciting six verses. It follows, therefore, that, when the 
 chorus said that they saw an actor three, four, five, or six verses 
 before he began speaking, he was at some point between P and 
 the door leading onto the stage, providing he was to reach the 
 stage through the paraskenion, and, if this was the case, we 
 are compelled to believe that at times the chorus said that they 
 saw those that in reality they did not see. That such was the 
 fact seems improbable. 
 
 The actor, then, when first seen by the chorus was not just 
 about to set foot on the stage, and he was not 
 approaching the stage from without the stage- 
 buildings. He was, therefore, when first seen by the parodos 
 
 the chorus, in the parodos, and drawingnigh to ^the^rchestm 
 the orchestra. As he approached in this manner 
 the chorus had no difficulty in seing him, whether he was far 
 away, or near at hand. 
 
 Understanding, no w, that the actor entered b} r the parodos, 
 we see why at times the chorus saw him more 
 quickly than did an actor already present, as This view explains 
 e. -., in the Ajax, where the chorus announced ^ISS""""! 
 (1042f.) that thev saw a foeman coming, and times seen by the 
 Teucer asked who it was (1044): the chorus re- **% 
 plied (1045) that it was Menelaus, and Teucer present 
 
 then (1046) saw him, the reason for this being 
 that, while the view dov. n the parodos of the chorus was un- 
 
136 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 obstructed, that of Teucer was for the moment obstructed by 
 the chorus. 
 
 We see also why newly-arrived actors often direct their first 
 
 and why words to the chorus, though other actors are 
 
 the choms present, and why at times actors on entering are 
 
 unable to see other actors who are present (cf. 
 
 Birds 1122f., and Orestes 356ff., 470ff.) 
 
 //. Instances where Actors Announce In-Coming Actors 
 Prom., 941, 3. Ajax, 1223, 3. CEd. Tyr., 78, 9; 1110, 11. 
 CEd. Col., 28, 5; 311, 13; 722, 6; 1249, 5. Tra- 
 chin., 58, 3; 594, 4. Alcestis, 24, 4. Medea, 46, 
 
 nounce in-coming 3; 1118, 3. Hipp. ,51, 7. Heracl., 48, 7. Sup. 
 (Eurip.), 395, 4. Hecuba, 52, 7. Her. Fur., 513, 
 10; 1153, 10. Ton, 392, 9. Troades, 706, 3. Electra (Eurip.), 
 107, 5; 964, 24. Orestes, 725, 4; 1313, 8. Phoenis., 695, 2; 
 1332, 3. Iph. in A., 1337, 7. Baccha, 212, 3; 657, 3. Cyclops, 
 85, 11. Acharn., 40, 3; 61, 3; 175, 1; 908, 2; 1083, 1; 1189, 
 4 words. Knights, 234, 1; 691, 3. Wasps, 1324, 2; 1415, 2; 
 1504, 4. Birds, 1121, 1. 1168, 2. Lysist., 65, 25; 727, 1. 
 Plutus, 332, 3. 
 
 The instances in this class bear a general resemblance to 
 This class resem- those in the preceding class. The number of 
 ties the preceding verses that elapse between the time when the 
 actor is seen to be approaching, and the time 
 when he arrives varies from one to twenty-five, 1 the average 
 number being five and one-half (nearly). 
 
 It cannot be claimed that the actor when first seen was 
 about to set foot on the stage. Occasionallv a 
 
 Actors not about . 
 
 to enter conversation takes place that evidently was not 
 
 on the stage carried on in his presence, as e. g. in the Hercules 
 
 when first seen _ . 
 
 Furens, where, after Hercules is seen drawing 
 nigh (513), Megara calls the children to her side. 
 
 1 Omitting Achar., 1189. 
 
THE STAGE 137 
 
 It may be claimed that in this class the actor announced as 
 approaching was waiting in the paraskenion, 
 and so was actually seen ; and it must be ad- Actors may have 
 mitted that such may have been the case. It i n the pT^askenion 
 cannot, however, be claimed that in the preced- 
 ing class the chorus saw the actor in the paraskenion awaiting 
 the proper moment for entering. 
 
 If we believe that in this class the actors entered the orches- 
 tra, we shall understand wh vat times they failed 
 
 .. . , n " ., Actors fail to ob- 
 
 to observe other actors already present, as e. g. ser ve other actors; 
 in the Here. Fur., where Hercules speaks two they address 
 
 , c i i i -i i j_i i the chorus first 
 
 verses before seeing his children, and then, as he 
 spies them exclaims (525) -i />; -=*/ <'(>& -/"> ow//rwv, and 
 we shall understand why, at times, actors on entering address 
 first the chorus, rather than other actors present. 
 
 On the assumption that, in both this and the preceding 
 classes, the actors entered the orchestra, we shall 
 understand why the choruses heralded the ap- C ^^^^. 
 proach oftener than did the actors. In the one n ounce the ap- 
 hundred and three instances in the two classes P roachof Doming 
 the approach of actors is announced by choruses 
 fifty-six times, by actors forty-seven times. It would appear, 
 therefore, that the position of the chorus was where it had a 
 clear view of the parodos, while the position of the actor was 
 nearer to the wall of the proscenium, and where the view of the 
 parodos, while not obstructed, was not quite so favorable as 
 was that of the chorus. 
 III. Instances where Actors Announce In-Coming Choruses 
 
 GEd. Col., Ill, 6. Phcenissae, 196, 6. Cy- 
 clops, 36, 5. Birds, 294, 15. Knights, 242, 5. JSSSZZ 
 
 Clouds, 323, 5. nounce in-coming 
 
 Iii the instances that come under this class 
 there is an added element to be considered. When men f ^t'ciSs 
 actors entered, it is reasonable to believe that, 
 in general, they did not begin speaking, till they were at the 
 center of action. Usually, the chorus began singing while still 
 in the parodos, the march in being accompanied by the chanting 
 of the entrance-song. At what place in the parodos this en- 
 
138 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 trance-song was begun, we have no information to tell us ; jet 
 we may not unreasonably conclude that it was generally begun 
 soon after the chorus entered the parodos, and thus came in 
 sight of the spectators. 
 
 In the Phoenissas, the Pedagogue at v. 196 says that he sees 
 The entrance the cnorus approaching. Six verses later, the 
 
 of the chorus chorus begin singing the parodos. If the Peda- 
 
 in the Phcenissae gO g Ue had been on the stage at v. 196, we can 
 believe that by looking through open doors he could have seen 
 the in-coming chorus when they were at or near the position in- 
 dicated by the letter D. Assuming this to be the case, the cho- 
 rus would have had just about sufficient time during the six re- 
 maining verses of the Pedagogue's announcement to reach a 
 place within the parodos at which we may believe them to have 
 begun the words at v. 202. Every case, however, will not be so 
 satisfactory, on the assumption that the actor took his view- 
 from the stage. 
 
 At v. Ill in the CEdipus Coloneus, Antigone sees the cho- 
 The entrance rus ^ ^ men drawing nigh. If, at this time An- 
 
 of the chorus tigone was on the stage, and, by looking through 
 
 doors in the paraskenion, saw the chorus ap- 
 proaching, the chorus when first seen, it would appear, must 
 have been near the position indicated by the letter D, for it 
 would not seem probable that Antigone could have seen any 
 part of the parodos that was much nearer the orchestra than 
 that indicated by the letter D. The chorus enter six verses after 
 being seen. Their first words are (117ff.) : 
 
 It is clear that these words were not spoken, as the chorus 
 drew nigh over the parodos, as was the case in the example 
 quoted above from the Phcenissae, but when they were near to 
 the place from which CEdipus had just been led. The chorus, 
 then, when they began speaking were at or near the position 
 indicated by E. From D to E is about seventy -five m. That 
 the chorus could have passed over so great a distance while An- 
 tigone was speaking six verses seems improbable. They would 
 
THE STAGE 139 
 
 naturally, while the six verses were being spoken, pass over a 
 distance equal to about that from Fto E; and we may believe 
 that, when Antigone announced the approach of the chorus, 
 they were at or near F,but it seems improbable that by looking 
 through doors in the paraskenion she could have seen the cho- 
 rus when they were at F, and the assumption in hand compels 
 us to believe that Antigone announced as approaching a chorus 
 that she did not see. This conclusion is unsatisfactory. 
 
 It may be claimed that Antigone looked directly into the 
 parodos from the stage, and thus saw the cho- 
 rus approaching. In order to see as far as V, it A ^oM n * 
 would have been necessary that she advance to directly into 
 
 the front of the stage, and lean far over, and, 
 even then, it may be doubted whether she could 
 have seen as far down the parodos as V. 
 
 The only position, therefore, that we can assign to an actor 
 A who announces the entrance of a chorus, in 
 
 * . ., 1,1 ,11 In tllis class 
 
 which we can be sure that he sees the chorus the the actor was 
 approach of which he announces, is the orches- probably 
 
 in the orchestra 
 
 tra. 
 
 IV. Instances where the Approach of Actors (and in One In- 
 stance of a Chorus) from the Palace in the Background is 
 Announced. 
 
 Choeph., 10, 12; 731, 3. Antig., 1180, 3. Electra(Soph.), 
 324, 4; 1324, 2. (Ed. Tyr., 531, 1; 631, 3. Al- 
 cestis, 136, 5; 509, 1. Medea, 1121, 3. Hipp., 
 170, 6; 1156, 1. Androm., 822, 3. Ion, 78, 4. come from 
 
 Troades, 306, 1. Helena, 858, 6. Iph. in Tau., 
 724, 1. Electra (Eurip.), 549, 4. Orestes, 1367, 2. Peace, 
 1265, 3. Lysist., 5, 1; 1106, 6. Thesmophor., 36, 3; 95, 6. 
 
 If the actor that came from the palace entered on a stage, 
 he was in his position, and ready to take his 
 part, almost as soon as he was seen. If this was 
 the case, an announcement of his approach co v- ^Yas in his 
 ering several verses was manifestly out of place, m 
 
 for, as in previous cases, it would have com- 
 pelled him to stand in his position most of this time, waiting 
 
140 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURl 
 
 for the announcement of his approach to be finished, that he 
 might speak. 
 
 When an actor is announced as coming from 
 
 The actor 
 
 in this class the palace, we must believe that he is actually 
 
 was actually seen coming forth ; in these announcements tipdat, 
 
 seen approaching , . 
 
 iiw.vw, epzo/jMt, and similar words are used. 
 
 An allowance may be made for the time con- 
 Time needed for . 
 
 him to reach his sumed in passing through the door-way, and 
 position, if this closing the door, but it will not be contended 
 
 was on the stage 
 
 that the time of more than one verse was re- 
 quired for this, and for the actor to reach his proper position, 
 granting that he entered on the stage. 
 
 If the actor entered the orchestra from the palace, and had, 
 A longer time con- thus, a considerable distance to pass over, before 
 sumed, if he entered he was in his proper position, a larger number 
 into the orchestra of Yerses wou]d natll rally be spoken between the 
 time when he was first seen and that when he was in his 
 position, and ready to take his part, than would be spoken if 
 he entered on the stage. In the instances cited above, it is seen 
 that the number of verses thus spoken varies from one to six 1 , 
 the average number of verses being three and one-half ; and this 
 nnmber of verses must represent the time consumed by the act- 
 or in walking from the palace door to a position well within 
 the orchestra. 
 
 In six instances, actors are present at the close of a single 
 verse after they are seen. In four of them we 
 
 In a few instances . . 
 
 actors are present may believe either that their approach was not 
 soon after observed till they were near at hand, or that the 
 
 needs of the plays did not require that their com- 
 ing be sooner announced ; yet in the Troades, where Hecuba 
 says that her daughter is rushing forth in a frenzied condition, 
 pawls Ood^s> dsvpo Ka<fdvdpa dpofj.w (307), we may infer that she 
 passed over the ground more quickly than would ordinarily be 
 the case. Likewise, it is reasonable to believe that QBdipus, as 
 he came from the palace (CEd. Tyr. 531), hastened his pace, and 
 
 1 Omitting the instance in the Choephori where the chorus are seen to be coming, 
 and where naturally a longer time would be consumed in passing from palace to 
 orchestra than would be consumed by an actor in passing over the same ground. 
 
THE STAGE 141 
 
 even spoke before reaching his propef position in the orchestra, 
 as he beheld before him his enemy Creon. 
 
 In the four instances where the announcements consist of 
 six verses, it is difficult to find a reason wiry the 
 
 111 -ij-ir In a few instances 
 
 actor came so slowly, beyond the fact that an unusually 
 
 the poet so desired. There is, however, in longtime 
 
 r , .. i TT -I -i is consumed 
 
 one of them, the Helena, strong evidence that 
 the actor came into the orchestra. Here Helen sees Theonce 
 coming ; she is in doubt what she shall do ; she meditates flight; 
 she speaks of her despair (858ff.). The view that would claim 
 that Theonoe here entered on a stage would claim also that 
 Helen was, at this time, 011 the stage; yet her words uttered 
 after seeing Theonoe were evidently not uttered in his presence ; 
 they were spoken as she stood in the orchestra, and saw him 
 drawing nigh to her. 
 
 In the presentation of the dramas of Shakespeare, the per- 
 formers are all on the stage, the actors enter 
 
 . fe ' p In the plays 
 
 through a doorway either in the rear or, or at O f Shakespeare 
 the end of, the sta^e. As they are, then, on the actors present soon 
 
 -,-.," . after being seen 
 
 stage, and ready 1or action almost as soon as 
 
 y are seen, we are not surprised to find that but few \vo:nds 
 are used to announce their presence. 
 
 A comparison of a few instances taken from the Greek dram- 
 atists, in which the actors came from the palace, 
 with similar instances taken from the English ofhakea"ae 
 dramatist will show how much longer a distance with the Greek 
 the Greek actor had to walk over in passing ^r^the former 
 from palace door to the position where he took the actor had a 
 his part, than the English actor has in passing ^t^pass'over 
 over a similar distance. 
 
 In Titus Andronicus, Act V., SCENE 1, the folio wing occurs : 
 Lucius: But who comes here led by a lusty 
 
 r\ j_i o Titus Audronicus : 
 
 G th ? Alcestis 
 
 Goth: Renowned Lucius, from our troops I 
 straved, etc. 
 
 i 
 
142 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 The question of Lucius is asked as he sees the Goth approach- 
 ing, and the Goth begins speaking with the next verse. With 
 this may be compared the following passage from Alcestis, 
 
 (136ff.): -W. /// i',o ("i-udwy lx dorjuuv Tt$ sfigsrai 
 
 The chorus here speak five .verses before the attendant is near 
 enough to speak. With the passage from An- 
 ' S clronicus may be compared also the following 
 from Hippolytus (170ff.): 
 
 v<ptt$ 
 
 TP. 
 
 In Antony and Cleopatra, Act III, SCENE 7, occurs the fol- 
 lowing: 
 
 Bnobarbvs: Here comes the Emperor. 
 Antony: Is it not strange, etc. 
 With this compare the following (Helena, 857ff.): 
 
 K.\. o-' 
 
 In the former instance, four w r ords are spoken after the actor 
 is seen before he begins speaking; in the latter instance, six 
 verses are spoken. 
 
THE STAGE 143 
 
 The following examples illustrate, still further, the fact that 
 the English actor has to walk but a short dis- 
 tance before he is in his position : 
 Antony and Cleopatra, Act /., SCENE 3 : Shakespeare 
 
 Charmian. But here comes Antony. 
 
 [ENTER Ante in-]. 
 
 Cleopatra. I am sick and sullen. 
 Antony. I am sorry, etc. 
 
 Act IV., SCENE 14. 
 Antony. Come, Eros, Eros. 
 
 [ENTER Eros.] 
 Eros. What \vould my lord, etc. 
 
 Act IF., SCENE 14. 
 Antony. The guard, ho ! O dispatch me ! 
 
 [ENTER Guard.] 
 First Guard. What's the noise ? 
 
 Hamlet, Act /., SCENE 1. 
 Francisco. I think I hear them. Stand, ho ! Who^s there? 
 
 [ENTER Horatio.] 
 Horatio. Friends to this ground. 
 
 Act HI., SCENE 4. 
 Queen. Withdraw. I hear him coming. 
 
 [ENTER Hamlet.] 
 Hamlet. Now, mother, what's the matter? 
 
 Act V., SCENE 2. 
 Horatio. Peace! Who comes here ? 
 
 [ENTER Osrh.] 
 Osric. Your Lordship is etc. 
 
 Titus Andronicus, Act HI., SCENE 1. 
 
 Titus Andronicus. But who comes with our brother Mar- 
 cus here ? 
 
 [ENTER Marcus.] 
 
 Marcus. Titus, prepare thy aged eyes to weep. 
 
 Macbeth, Act L, SCENE 3. 
 Banquo. Who's here? 
 
 [ENTER .Ross.] 
 Ross. The king hath happily received etc. 
 
144 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 Act T 7 ., SCENE 3. 
 
 Macbeth. Say ton ! 
 
 [ENTER Sayton.~\ 
 
 Say ton. What is your gracious pleasure ? 
 It will be observed that in the instances cited from Shakes- 
 peare, in but a single instance does more than 
 
 The inference to be one Y erSC elapSC between the time When an act- 
 drawn from the . < , i , i i i t 
 
 comparison or is seen and the time when he begins speaking. 
 
 In the last instance cited, the actor's name is 
 mentioned, and the next words are spoken by him. The con- 
 clusion is justifiable that the larger number of intervening verses 
 in the Greek drama is due to the fact that the Greek actor had 
 a longer distance to walk before reaching the position where he 
 took his part. 
 
 The tests that have been applied in ascertaining the place to 
 
 which actors came whose approach was an- 
 tr^n^no'nced Bounced yield no evidence concerning the place 
 
 to which actors came whose approach was not 
 annotmced ; yet if it be admitted that the former class entered 
 the orchestra, it will necessarily follow that the latter class also 
 entered the orchestra. 
 
 We can believe that the entrance of actors over the parodos 
 
 was always a pleasing feature of the presenta- 
 
 The entrance t j oll The actors were, thus, in full view of the 
 
 a pleasing feature spectators from the moment when they stepped 
 within the parodos, and we can imagine with 
 what eagerness the eyes of the spectators followed the ap- 
 proaching actor, as the spectators wondered what effect on the 
 action the new arrival was to produce ; and we can count as 
 among the beautiful scenes in the classic drama the en trance of 
 actors in chariots, as they slowly approached the orchestra by 
 the parodos. 1 
 
 1 See the description in Harrison and Verrall's 'Mythology and Monuments of 
 Ancient Greece', p. 292sq. of the arrival of Agamemnon, as he drew nigh in his chariot 
 over the parodos. 
 
THE STAGE 145 
 
 $7. SUMMARY OF CHAPTER III. 
 
 The conclusions that have been reached in the present chap- 
 ter may be briefly summarized : 
 
 (1)" Certain passages from the plays of the 
 dramatists cited as evidence of a stage, when 
 correctly interpreted, contain no such evidence (p. 70sq.). 
 
 (2) The chorus did not stand on a raised platform (p. 81sq.). 
 
 (3) It is probable that no steps led from orchestra to stage 
 
 (p. 88 sq.). 
 
 (4) The evidence of archaeological investigations is that the 
 actors stood in the orchestra (p. 90sq.). 
 
 (5) The evidence of the extant plays is that the actors stood 
 in the orchestra (p. 94sq.). 
 
 (6) The actors when not coming from the palace in the 
 background entered the orchestra by the parodos ; the actors 
 that came from the palace entered directly into the orchestra 
 (p. 132sq.). 
 
 The evidence against a stage that the extant plays afford 
 mav rest chieflv on the following situations : 
 
 - . The chief situations 
 
 Scenes in which there is actual personal en- discussed in r> 
 counter between chorus and actors, or possibili- 
 ty of such encounter. Cf. Sup. (^Es.), 836, 852, 
 883, 940f. Persae, 529. A gam., 1651f. Chceph., 983f. Ajax, 
 361. CEd. Tyr., 1349f., 141 Off., 1429. CEd. Col., 176f., 491, 
 834ff. Philoc., 1003, 1174-1205. Hipp., 777. Heracl., 69f., 
 274, 307f. Sup. (Earip.), 1160. Here. Fur., 2 6 If., 52 7ff. Hel- 
 ena, 1628ff. Iph. in Tau., 468, 1068ff. Orestes, 474. Bacchae, 
 1184. Rhesus, 675if., 730, 877. Cyclops, 210f., 471ff., 590ff. 
 Achar.,280ff.,564f. Knights, 251f, 451ff, 491ff, 922. Wasps, 
 383, 437if. Birds, 344, 364f. Thesmophor., 690f, 726ff. 
 
 Chorus enter the palace. Cf. Medea, 820, 866. Cyclops, 
 82ff. Lysist., 1182if. 
 
 Chorus approach the palace, but do not enter. Cf. Ajax, 
 354ft'. Hipp., 804. Here. Fur., 747ff., 1031ff. Rhesus, Iff. 
 
 Chorus deliberate whether they will enter the palace, or are 
 invited to do so. Cf. Agam., 1350. Ajax, 329, 986. Electra 
 (Soph.), 1103f. Medea, 1275ff. Hipp., 575ff, 782. Androm., 
 
146 THE ATTIC STAGE ( F THE FIFTH CL\\TL'RY 
 
 817. Hecuba, 1042. Ion, 219ff. Helena, 32 7ff. Ipb. in Tau., 
 470, 1079. 
 
 The position of the chorus is near the palace. Cf. Philoc., 
 207. Alcestis, 86f., lOOf. Medea, 1293. Ion, 510. Orestes, 
 136ff., 173ff. Bacchae, 58ff. Lysistrata, 310ff. 
 
 Chorus act as guard. Cf. Ajax, 1182f. Philoc., 150ff. 
 Iph. in Tau., 638.' Orestes, 1251ff. Rhesus, 15, 524, 813. 
 
 Chorus observe actors closely. Cf. Antigone, 526ff. Philoc., 
 861. Trachin., 964ff. V Here. Fur., 130ff. Electra (Burip.), 
 184f. 
 
 Chorus enter orchestra from palace. Cf. Eumen., 140ff. 
 Troades, 176f. Lysistrata, 319, 1239. Eccl., 33ff. 
 
 Search scenes, in which the chorus pass over the space us- 
 ually occupied by the actors. Cf. Eumen., 244if., 255f. Ajax, 
 891ff. CEd. CoL, 121f Thesmophor., 597ff., 655ff. 
 
 Actors enter orchestra with chorus. Cf. Sup. (^Es.), 1. 
 Choeph., lOff. Hecuba, 59ff. Plutus, 253ff. 
 
 Actors leave by a parodos. Cf. Iph. in Aul., lllff. Bacchae, 
 974ff. 
 
 Actors on entering do not see other actors present. Cf. An- 
 drom., 881ff. Hecuba, 484ff. Iph. in Tau., 1152ff. Electra 
 (Eurip.), 112ff. Orestes, 356ff., 470ff. Phcenissae, 301ff. Bac- 
 chae, 215ff. Birds, 11223". ' 
 
 Actors enter in chariots. Cf. Persae, 159(?),907(?)<. Agam., 
 782. Electra (Eurip.), 988. Iph. in Aul., 607. 
 
 Actors have contact with spectators. Cf. Peace, 881ff. 
 Progs, 296ff. 
 
 Actors on entering address the chorus, though other actors 
 aie present, and would be naturally first addressed. Cf. Persae, 
 681ff. Electra (Soph.), 660, 1098~. CEd. Tyr., 924. CEd. CoL, 
 728, 1500. Philcctetes addresses his first word^ to both cho- 
 rus and actor: cf. Philoc., 219ff. 
 
 Libation scenes in which both chorus and actors partici- 
 pate. Cf. Persae, 623ff. Choeph., 149ff. Iph. in Tau.. 159ff., 
 179ff. 
 
 Assembly scenes which were, no doubt, made to resemble 
 real assembly scenes. Cf. Achar., 20f., 42ff., 56, 91, 156, 172. 
 Thesmo., 284ff., 292ff., 312ff., 372ff., 383ff., 443ff. Eccle., 57, 
 103, 122ff. 
 
THE .STAGS 147 
 
 The numbers present were at times greater than could find 
 room on a stage. Cf. Septem, Iff., 30ff. Again., 906ff. .Trial 
 scene in the Enmenides. Trachin., 202f., 299f. Androm., 115, 
 135, 161. Sup. (Eurip.), 10. A stage in some plays was un- 
 suited to the scene represen ted : cf. Prom., 2, 31, 55f. ' CEd. Col., 
 10, 17, 98. Philoc., 1, 16, 21, 28f., 1262. Cyclops, where the 
 scene is a cave. Birds, 54, 92, 202, 207. 
 
 The distegia at times represents a large area. Cf. Agam., 
 Iff. Orestes, 1573ff. Clouds, 1490ff. Wasps, 143ff. Peace, 
 223ff. 
 
 At the close of many plays, actors and choruses leave the 
 theatre together. Cf. Sup. (^Es.), 980ff Persae, 1038ff Sep- 
 tem, 1068ff. Eumen., 1003ff. Ajax, 1413ff. Antig., 1339ff 
 Philoc., 1469. Sup. (Eurip.), 1232. Hecuba, 1288ff. Troades, 
 296f, 1266ff, 1331f. Bacchse, 1381ff. t Rhesus, 986ff. Cyclops, 
 441f., 701ff. Achar., 1231ff. Clouds, 1510. Wasps, 1535ff. 
 Peace, 1354ff Birds, 1755ff. Lysis., 1273ff. Frogs, 1524ff. 
 Eccl., 1149ff. Plutus, 1208f. 
 
 In many plays there was a sympathy existing between cho- 
 rus and actors such as would lead us to believe that all were 
 together. Cf. Ion, 748, 857. Iph. in Tau., 63,143, 1056. Bacchae, 
 582ff, 609ff. The chorus are instructed to warmly welcome 
 Agamemnon : cf. Agam., 524; cf. also the conversation between 
 the chorus and Cassandra, vs. 1053-1300, in the same play. Cf. 
 the sympathy of the chorus for Electra, as displayed in the con- 
 versation vs. 121 327, of the Electra (Soph.), and, again, in the 
 same play, where the chcrt:s try to comfort Electra, vs. 804- 
 874. CEdipus trusts the chorus, in the CEd. Col., v. 175; he 
 calls them his allies, v. 815. Deianira, in the Trachiniae, tells the 
 chorus her v. oes in private, vs. 531ff: and the chorus in the 
 Persae dread to speak in the presence of Darius, vs. 694f. 
 
 The chorus bow before the king in the CEd. Tyr. Cf. vs. 40f. 
 and 327. They prostrate themselves, in the Phcenissae. Cf. 291 
 ff. In the Here. Fur., when Hercules enters, he finds his chil- 
 dren in the orchestra. Cf. 527ff. Dicasopolis,intheAcharnians, 
 brings a block into the orchestra. Cf. 365ff. Polymnestor, in 
 the Hecuba, goes into the orchestra from the tent. Cf. 1070f. 
 In the Alcestis, occurs a funeral procession. Chorus and actor 
 
148 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 leave the theatre together, and return together later. Cf . 4-22 
 ff., 606ff., 740, 861, 872. 
 
 $8. THE MISTAKES OF YITRUVIUS 
 
 Assuming, now, that the actors stood in the orchestra, to- 
 vitruvius states gether with the chorus, it remains to see how it 
 that the actors was that Vitruvius came to be mistaken, for he 
 
 I on a stage gayg distinctly l that tbe actorg stood Qn the 
 
 stage, and that the stage had the name /^s?v.2 Vitruvius is 
 exact in all his statements ; but we must remember that he lived 
 in the first century B. C., and that the only theatre that he 
 could have become acquainted with was the so-called Roman 
 theatre. From the facts that he saw concerning the stage in 
 that theatre, he inferred other facts concerning a stage in the 
 Greek theatre of the fifth century. 
 
 The historical facts relating to the theatre, both Greek and 
 some historical Roman, are dear. When tragedy arose from the 
 facts relating dithyrambic^ chorus, and an actor was intro- 
 
 duced, this actor stood on a tabled By ^Eschy- 
 lus a second actor was introduced, anda^-/^/; became necessary , 
 that the actors might have a place in which to ciiange their 
 dresses. Before this time, the table had been used, in order to 
 give elevation to the actor ; now the cothurnus was invented, 
 which served the purpose that before that time had been served 
 by the table. The assumption that the cothurnus, and other 
 means of artificial dress were used in order to give the actors the 
 appearance of superior beings is not correct, for, if such had 
 been the case, they w^ould not have been used by all the actors 
 alike. They were, in fact, used by nurses, and slaves, and her- 
 alds, as \vell as by heroes. The only object, then, of cothurnus, 
 onkos, flowing robes, and padded bodies was to give to the act- 
 ors a prominence that would distinguish them from the cho- 
 reutas. 
 
 1 Vitruv., 7, 2 ; quoted above p. 70. 
 
 2 For the views of Dr. Kaweran, which are adopted by Dr. Dorpfeld, and are here 
 set forth, cf. Miss Harrison, Class. Rev., May, 1890, p. 274sq. Cf. also Pickard, Am. 
 Jour. Phil., April, 1893, p. 68ff. 
 
 3 Poll., IV., 123: i/soc '? '>,'>> r;tf-i!Ttf aiaia 1 V ""' ( ~>^-'.o<>^ =K" "^ 
 
THE STAC,/-; 149 
 
 During the fifth century, then, actors and chorus stood in 
 the orchestra. There was a ffxr^rj to which the- 
 actors retired when they were to change their . J he p sitions 
 
 & of chorus, actors, 
 
 dresses. The scenery used was variable. It was scenery and 
 
 for each plav what the requirements of that play 
 
 ^ * ~ 111 the V. century 
 
 demanded. The position of the ffxr^rj was, nat- 
 urally, on the side of the orchestra the more remote from the 
 spectators ; .there, also, was the scenery, and there, also, stood 
 the actors, directly in front of the ffxr^rj. 
 
 In Roman times the chorus had disappeared ; therefore the 
 whole of the orchestra was not needed in the Theiowerin- 
 
 presentation of the plays. Vitruvius tells us of the orchestra 
 that in the half of the orchestra thus not needed 
 the senators sat. But, if they had sat on the level of the orches- 
 tra, the senators in the rear rows could not have seen the act- 
 ors over the heads of the senators in front of them. According- 
 ly, it was necessary to either raise the half of the orchestra up- 
 on which the actors stood, or to lower the half upon which the 
 senators sat. The latter course was followed. The part of the 
 orchestra that was lowered received the name of /"-^V-^,: the 
 part on which the actors stood was called, and rightly, /;'">, 
 for it was the place on which the actors spoke. 
 
 In support of this view is the fact that in many of the thea- 
 tres that were altered in Roman times the low- 
 est row of circular seats is on a level with the The above test 
 
 ATM /TV aS a PP^ e( ' to 
 
 MtystHV. ThlS IS the Case at AlZani, lelmCSSCS, certain theatres 
 
 Patava, Aspendos, Pergamos, and Assos. If, in 
 these theatres, the semi-circular x<o :>?-// should be filled up to the 
 level of the lowest row of seats, \ve should have the original or- 
 chestra of the fifth century. 
 
 The orchestra, then, of the fifth century was divided, in 
 later times, into two parts, the /."^>v, the wic- 
 
 ' . The, assumption 
 
 -". In view of this fact we understand how it that the orchestra 
 was that the word ty,/^-^/ came to be applied was divided makes 
 
 clear various lacts 
 
 to either of these two parts. \\e understand, 
 also, how it was that the ^c/-/. which belonged in the center 
 of the old orchestra, when this latter was divided, was placed 
 in either the /."/'?//> or the x>:'/rr^. It becomes clear, also, why 
 
150 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 in the Roman theatre the audience entered not, as in the Greek 
 theatre, by the parodoi; but by underground passages. The 
 parodoi led to the higher part of the old orchestra; accordingly, 
 the audience could not enter by them ; they were reserved for 
 the actors. It may be added, further, that it was entireh- ap- 
 propriate that the part of the orchestra that was occupied by 
 the senators, who were spectators, should be distinct from the 
 part that was occupied by the actors. 
 
 Thus, the mistakes of Vitruvius are understood. He saw 
 
 the Roman stage, and, in its rear, the prosceni- 
 
 22^ um columns twelve feet high with a platform 
 
 ing a Qreek stage, on top of them. He assumed, therefore, that in 
 
 from^th, ian the fifth century also the actO rs performed on a 
 
 stage ; but he remembered that in the fifth cen- 
 tury there was a chorus. Accordingly, he assumed that the 
 actors stood on the roof of the proscenium, and to this roof he 
 gave the name by which the stage of his ow r n day was desig-- 
 nated he called it the biysiov ; while the facts are seen to be that 
 the actors both of the fifth century and of the time of Vitruvius 
 stood on the same spot, that in front of the proscenium. 
 
 There has been quoted above 1 a passage fromSuidas, which 
 
 may be taken as a correct description of a 
 The description Roman theatre of the time of Vitruvius. Suidas 
 
 of a Roman . . 
 
 theatre mentions first the ffxr^ which is here called the 
 
 center door (in the proscenium), and is men- 
 tioned first, perhaps, because it w^as the most prominent object 
 before the eyes of the spectator. On both sides of the ffxr^rj are 
 the -aitafixrjv'.a. After these comes the orchestra, which he might 
 have called by its new name of /^*v. At this place, he says, 
 the actors contend. The next object named after the orchestra 
 is the altar of Dionysus; and, finally, is mentioned the part 
 most remote from the stage, the xvjVr//. 
 
 The words of the scholiast in the introduction to the Clouds 
 
 are a further confirmation of the belief that the 
 
 of the scholiast half of the orchestra of the fifth century which 
 
 in the introduction xvas mor Q remote from the spectators became 
 
 to the Clonds 
 
 the Aosrov of the Roman theatre. The words are: 
 
 1 Page 82. 
 
THE STACK 151 
 
 Iv rf; o<wffri> -<? * '.sr!*'''V ; -"/' 'V- The words are correctly ex- 
 plained by Isidor, Origg. 18, 43 : pulpitns, qui pulpitus orches- 
 tra vocabatur, and 44: orchestra autem pulpitus erat. 
 
CHAPTER I 
 THE GENESIS AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 
 
 CONTENTS 
 1. The Divisions of Greek Poetry : 
 
 2. Singing by Individuals in Homer: PAGE 
 
 The Song of Calypso .... 14 
 
 The Song of Circe . . . . .14 
 
 The Song of Achilles .... 14 
 
 Character of these songs . . . .14 
 
 3. Early Meanings of the Word y<>jn'^'. 
 
 Yafjp6$ signifying place ... 15 
 
 YOf)6$ -where the idea of dancing is prominent . 15 
 Adornment at the dance .... 15 
 
 yopv* transferred to the dancer . . . lo 
 
 4. Choral Exercises in Homer and in Hesiod : 
 
 THE P^SAN: Sung when in Homer . . 16 
 
 The Paean in Iliad I . . . . .16 
 
 The Paean in Iliad XXII . . 16 
 
 No dancing in the Homeric Paean . . .16 
 
 The Paean in later times .... 16 
 
 Metrical form of the Homeric Paean . . .16 
 
 THE THRENOS: Defined , . 17 
 
 Early cultivation of the Threnos . . . 17 
 
 The Linus-song: .... 17 
 
 The three characters of Linus . . .17 
 
 An extant Linus-song . . 17 
 
 Connected with the death of the seasons . . 17 
 
 Hesiod says concerning the Linus-song . 17 
 
 The Linus-song in Homer . . .18 
 
 Characteristics of . . . 18 
 
 The Threnos in the Iliad . . .18 
 
 Characteristics of ... 18 
 
 The Threnos in the Odyssey . . . .19 
 
 Metrical form of the Threnos 19 
 
 Later history of the Threnos . . .19 
 
 THE HYMEN^EUS: The Hymenaeus in the Iliad . 19 
 
 The Hymenaeus in Hesiod . . . .19 
 
 The Hymenaeus in later writers ... 19 
 
 THE HYPORCHEME : The Hyporcheme in the Iliad . 20 
 The Hyporcheme in the Hymn to Apollo . 2O 
 
 The Hyporcheme in the Odyssey . . .20 
 
 The Hyporcheme defined . 2O 
 
 Popularity of the Hyporcheme . . 20 
 
 Its antiquity . 20 
 
 Its chief characteristics . . 21 
 
 PARTHENIA IN HOMER 21 
 
 The instance in the Iliad . . 21 
 
 RESPONSIVE SINGING IN THE ILIAD ... 21 
 
 SUMMARY OF CHORAL FORMS IN HOMER AND IN HKSIOD . 21 
 
 (153) 
 
154 THE ATTIC STAGE OF THE FIFTH CENTURY 
 
 5. The Divisions of Lyric Poetry : PAGE 
 
 Lyric poetry includes only melic . . 22 
 
 The elegiac and the iambic called ~r/ . . 22 
 
 Melic poetry divided into two schools . . 22 
 
 The distinctions between them . . .22 
 
 6. The Cultivation of Greek Music : 
 
 The tetrachord ..... 23 
 
 Terpander ...... 23 
 
 Olympus ..... 23. 
 
 Thaletas .... .23 
 
 7. Choral Exercises of the ^Eolie School of Poets: 
 
 SAPPHO: Songs for a single voice ... 24 
 Songs lor choruses ..... 24 
 
 ANACREON His character .... 24 
 
 His songs for choruses . . . 24 
 
 ALC^SUS: No choral poetry .... 24 
 
 8. Choral Exercises of the Doric School of Poets: 
 
 Further development of the chorus . . 25 
 
 THE STROPHE: In choral poetry . . .25 
 
 Its origin ..... 25 
 
 In elegiac poetry . . . . .25 
 
 The melic ; the Doric .... 25 
 
 Melic strophe described .... 25 
 
 The Doric strophe described . . 25 
 
 The epode . . . . . .25 
 
 Origin of anti-strophic recital . . . 25 
 
 ALCMAX: His contemporaries .... 26 
 
 His predecessors .... 26 
 
 His excellence . . . . .26 
 
 He celebrated secular occasions ... 26 
 His parthenia ..... 26 
 Features of his choruses . . . .26 
 
 His other compositions for choruses' . . . 27 
 
 His metres . . . . . 27 
 
 Remaining choral poets not at Sparta . . 27 
 
 STESICHORUS: His originality . . . 27 
 
 Size of his chorus . . . . . 27 
 
 The epode ..... 27 
 
 His epico-lyric hymns . . . 27 
 
 IBYCUS: He belongs to two schools . . . 28 
 
 His love songs . . . . .28 
 
 These produced on what occasions . . 28 
 
 Remaining masters of choral poetry : . . . 28 
 
 Add no new elements .... 28 
 
 The hymn of Stesichorus ... . . 28 
 
 Lyric poets compose for pay . . , 29 
 
 Bacchylides . . . . . .29 
 
 Pindar ...*... 29 
 Timocreon ...'... 29 
 
 9. The Worship of Dionysus : 
 
 A new kind of poetrj^ needed . . . 29 
 
 Why the dithyramb was popular . 3O 
 
THE GENESIS AXD DEVELOPMENT OF THE CHORUS 155 
 
 9. The Worship of Dionysus (Concluded): 
 
 Why the dithyramb was capable of dramatic development : 3O 
 
 (1) Opportunities for forming plots . . 3O 
 
 (2) Opportunities for assuming characters . . 31 
 
 10. The Dithyramb of Arion : 
 
 Cultivated at Corinth .... 32 
 
 Arion's chorus . . . . . .32 
 
 The idp%aty . . . . . 32 
 The musical accompaniment .... 32 
 
 The size of the chorus .... 33 
 
 11. The Development of Tragedy from the Dithyramb: 
 
 The extension of the part of the izdftfttav . . 33 
 
 The extension of subjects .... 33 
 
 The dithyramb at Athens becomes tragedy . . 34. 
 
 The final step the addition of the actor . . 34 
 
 12. The Further Development of Tragedy : 
 
 The chorus of Thespis . . . . .34- 
 
 The chorus of Phrynichus .... 34 
 
 The chorus of Choerilus . . . . .35 
 
 Pratinas and the satyr-drama ... 35 
 
 Characteristics of the satyr-drama . . .35 
 
 AESCHYLUS: Shortened the choral odes . . 36 
 
 Added a second actor . . . .36 
 
 SOPHOCLES: Added a third actor ... 36 
 
 Shortened the choral odes .... 36 
 
 EURIPIDES: Shortened the choral odes . . 36 
 
 Decline of the chorus as a living element . . .36 
 
 The ideal chorus ..... 37 
 
 13. The Subsequent Cultivation of the Dithyramb, anJ of Lyric Poetry: 
 
 The dithyramb continued in Doric states . .37 
 
 The 'Attic' dithyramb .... 37 
 
 The decline of lyric poetry . . . .38 
 
CHAPTER II 
 THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHORUS 
 
 CONTEXTS 
 
 U The Number of the Choreutae: PAGE 
 
 The tragic chorus of fifteen : the comic chorus of twenty-four 40 
 Sophocles the first to tase a tragic chorus of fifteen . . 40 
 
 The tragic chorus of fourteen . . . 41 
 
 The tragic chorus of filty . . . .41 
 
 Was the innovation of Sophocles adopted by vKschylus ? 42 
 
 The tragic chorus of forty-eight . . . .43 
 
 The changes in the size of the chorus . . . 44 
 
 2 The Position of the Choreutae: 
 
 At its entrance the chorus pi-esented its left side to the specta- 
 
 tors . . . . . .45 
 
 The entrance sometimes by the eastern parodos . 45 
 
 The parts of the chorus ..... 46 
 
 The entrance called tar a (J-o'.y^n);. -/.a~a 'C'rfd . 46 
 
 Diagram of a chorus entering- 7.<i.~ii. ffTiifyoOf . . 46 
 
 Diagram of a chorus entering "/.<!.- 1 I. Zrj'ff/. . . 47 
 
 The XOLTOL ffT(H%vU$ formation common . . 47 
 
 Position of the chorus after reaching the orchestra . 47 
 
 Position of the left file when the chorus entered by the east- 
 ern parodos ..... 48 
 
 Position of the chorus during the dialogue, and during 
 
 the stasima ..... 49 
 
 Exit of the chorus at the close of, arid during the play . 49 
 Lines in the orchestra .... 5O 
 
 * HijLt%upWv\ o'.yjif>ia . 5O 
 
 Position of the coryphaeus in a chorus of fifteen . 51 
 
 Position of the corA'phreus in a chorus of twelve . . 51 
 
 3 The names of the Chorentse: 
 
 Their names derived from their positions . . 52 
 
 The titles of the coryphaeus . . . .53 
 
 The choregus as coryphaeus .... 53 
 The poet as trainer; the choregiis, the <;~<>i)'.fir>.(T/.(J.)j>\\ 
 
 as coryphaeus . . ^ . . 53 
 
 The skill of the choreutae varied in different files . 54 
 
 4- A Secondary Chorus . 
 
 II <i.t> (!.*/(> t>-f t Y-fi<>.tl. ; <l.f><!.f>7.-r'i^'.i)V . . . 54 
 
 Passages in which occurs the word ^(i.ini.y^iirr^'r^n^J. . 55 
 
 Examples of afifS.^iifirjfrjfj.aTf/, and of ~ a. [> <i.fi /.r t 'j'.a . 55 
 
 5 The Choregus: 
 
 The appointment of the choregus . . 55 
 
 The duties of the choregus .... 57 
 
 The expenses of the choregus . . . 57 
 
 Minor details concerning the clioregus . . . 58 
 
 The decline of the choregia .... 59 
 
 (156) 
 
Till- EXTERNAL CH.\ AMC77- R'lSTICS OF Till- CHOW'S IT, 7 
 
 The Delivery of the Choral Parts : . 
 The parodoi 
 The stasinia 
 
 Shorter songs of the whole chorus 
 Words spoken by the coryph.-i.-us 
 Commoi 
 
 The delivery of the words in certain doubtful instances . 03 
 The parabasis 
 
 7 The Costume of the Choreutae: 
 
 The costume of the choreutae in tragedy . 
 
 The costume of the choreutae in comedy 
 
 The costume of the choreutae in the satyr:c clr.i 
 
CHAPTER III 
 THE STAGE 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 1 Alleged Evidence in Favor of the Stage : 
 
 The statements of Vitruvius a::cl Pollux concerning the Greek 
 
 stage ..... 70 
 
 Five passages from Ar:.; to phar.es claimed as evidence of a 
 
 stage . . . . . .71 
 
 The scholium on the Knights . . 72 
 
 The explanation of Sttidas 
 
 The interpretation of the two scholia . 72 
 
 dv<Z/5'vV in the passage from the Knights has really 
 
 no force . . . . .73 
 
 XflCTflC/JfittWiV in the fourth passage is used met'iphoricnl- 
 
 ly ..... 73 
 
 dva-XaTOL-pCttvStV in other writers . . . 73 
 
 The commands in the five passages are to actor?, who 
 
 have just entered ... 73 
 
 The five passages furnish no evidence of a stage . 74 
 
 A passage in the Birds claimed to supply evidence of a stage 74 
 A passage in the Lysistrat:i claimed to supply evidence of 
 
 a stage ..... 74 
 
 A passage in the Suppliees ( .-Ks. ) claimed to sttpp'y evidence 
 
 of a stage . . . . .75 
 
 A passage in the Peace claimed to suppU- evidence of a stage 75 
 Passages in which it is claimed that the chorus withdrew 
 
 close to the wall of the sta;-e : . 76 
 
 (1) Choephori, 872ff. . 76 
 
 (2) Hercules Furens, 1081ff. ... 77 
 
 (3) Ecclesiazusa?, 496ff. . . . .77 
 
 (4) Acharnians, 239f. .... 77 
 The entrance of the chorus into the palace prevented . 78 
 The passage in Plato's Symposium ... 79 
 The stone border would not have interfered with free action 80 
 No difficulty in distinguishing actors from chorus, if all were 
 
 in the orchestra together . . .SO 
 
 Need of a shallow stage claimed . . . 80 
 
 2 The Thymele: 
 
 The difficulties presented by a high stage avoided by assum- 
 ing a platform for the chorun . . 81 
 A passage quoted 1>y Wicseler and Hermann as evidence of 
 
 a platform . ... 
 
 The arguments drawn from this passage 
 
 Passages quoted bv M tiller as shov/in evidence of a plat- 
 form . . . . . 82 
 None of these passages supply evidence of a platform . 84 
 Positive evidence against the existence of a platform : 84 
 
 (1) It would have interfered with the dithyrnm bit- 
 
 contests .... 84 
 
 (2) No traces of such a platform remain . . 84 
 
 (3) The circle on the floor of the orchestra at Kpidaurus 84 
 
 (158) 
 
THE STAGE 159 
 
 2 TheThymele: (Concluded.) 
 
 (4) The ornamented columns of the proscenium . 84 
 
 ( ~> ) The exit of the chorus at the close of many plays 85 
 
 ((>) The view of the occupants of the front thronoi . 85 
 
 The occupants of the front thronoi . 86 
 
 (7) The steps at Eretria, and elsewhere . . 87 
 
 (8) A low stage would have been preferred to a high 
 
 stage and a platform ... 87 
 
 S3 The Steps ; the Distegia : 
 
 If there was passing between orchestra and stage, steps 
 
 were needed ..... 88 
 
 No traces of such steps remain . . . .88 
 
 Steps would have prevented free action of the chorus . 88 
 
 The vase-paintings in Magna Grrecia . . . 89 
 
 The depth of the distegia .... 89 
 Had the actors stood on a stage, many o!' tl:e spectators 
 
 would have had but a poor view of them. . 90 
 
 4- Archaeological Investigations: 
 
 Three sources of information ... 90 
 
 The ancient orchestra ; other ruins . . .91 
 The stage buildings and cavea belong to the same period of 
 
 construction ..... 92 
 
 The proscenium more recent than the stage buildings . 93 
 
 The columns of the proscenium ; the doors . . 93 
 
 No fixed type of stage-buildings in early times . . 93 
 
 >f> Evidence Against a Stage from the Extant Pla3 7 s: 
 
 ."Kschylus : 
 
 Supplices ..... 94 
 
 I'ersae . . . . . .95 
 
 Seven against Thebes .... 97 
 
 Prometheus Vinctus . . . 97 
 
 Agamemnon . . 99 
 
 Clucphori ...... 1OO 
 
 Eumenidcs ..... 100 
 
 Sophocles : 
 
 Ajax ...... 101 
 
 Antigone . . . . .103 
 
 Klectra ...... 103 
 
 (Kdipus Tyramms . , . 1O4 
 
 (Kdipus Colotieus ... . 1O5 
 
 PhiloctcU-s . . 106 
 
 Trachinke . . . . . 1O7 
 
 Euripides: 
 
 Alcestis ...... 108 
 
 Medea ...... 1O9 
 
 Hippolytus . . 109 
 
 Andromache . 110 
 
 Heracleida- . . . 111. 
 
 Suppliees . .111 
 
 Hecuba . 112 
 
 Hercules Furciis . . .113 
 
 Ion ...... 114 
 
 Troades ... .115 
 
 Helena . . 115 
 
 Iphigenia in Taurus . . . 116 
 
1()0 7777: ATTIC STAC, It Ol< Till-: /7/-T/7 CHXTl'RY 
 
 Sf> Evidence against a stage from the Extant Plays: 
 Kitripides: (Concluded.) 
 
 Electra . . . . . 117 
 
 Orestes . . . . . .117 
 
 Phoenisso.- , . . .111) 
 
 Iphigenia in Atilis . . . . 110 
 
 Bacchae . . . . . 1 2<) 
 
 Khesus . . . .121 
 
 Cyclops . . . 1 22 
 Aristophanes : 
 
 Acharni.'ins . .... 1 2.". 
 
 Knights . . .124- 
 
 Clouds . . . . .125 
 
 Wasps ..... I2f> 
 
 I'c-ace- . . . . .120 
 
 Birds .... 127 
 
 Lysistratu . . . . . 12S 
 
 Thesrnophoriay.us.'u . . 129 
 
 Frogs . . . 130 
 
 Kcclcsiazusa? . . . 131 
 
 I'lutus . . . . . . .131 
 
 SO Evidence Against a Stage from Certain Facts Connected with the 
 Entrance of Actors and of Choruses : 
 
 All actors entered into the orchestra either by a parodos, 
 
 or directly from the palace in the background . 132 
 
 Four aspects of the entrance considered : . .132 
 
 (1) Instances where choruses announce in-coming act- 
 
 ors . . .132 
 
 Average number of verses spoken while actor is ap- 
 proaching . . . 133 
 
 The time required for walking half wav across the 
 
 stage . 133 
 
 Actors actually seen . . . .133 
 
 Actors probably not just about to enter on the 
 stage from door in side-wing when first seen by 
 the choruses . . . .1 33 
 
 Conversations not carried on in the presence of the 
 
 in-coming actors .... 134 
 
 The actor when first seen was without the stage- 
 buildings .... 1 3f> 
 
 The actor when first seen was in the parodos, and 
 
 approaching the orchestra . . .135 
 
 This view explains various facts . . 135 
 
 (2) Instances where actors announce in-coming actors 130 
 This class resembles the preceding class . 136 
 Actors not about to enter on the stage when first 
 
 seen . . . 13G 
 
 Actors may have been waiting in paraskenion 137 
 
 Actors fail to observe other actors ; they address 
 
 chorus first . . . . .137 
 
 Choruses oftener than actors announce approach 
 
 of in-coming actors . . . 137 
 
 (3) Instances where actors announce in-coming cho- 
 
 ruses ..... 137 
 
 An added element in this class . . 137 
 
 The entrance of the chorus in the Phoenissa- . 13S 
 
 The entrance of the chorus in the CEd. Col . 1 3S 
 
 Antigone probably was not looking direct! v into 
 
 the parodos from the stage . . . 130 
 
Tin; STACK 101 
 
 6 Evidence against a Stage from Certain Facts Connected with the 
 Entrance of Actors and of Choruses : (Concluded.) 
 
 (3) Instances where actors announce in-coming cho- 
 
 ruses: (Concluded) : 
 In this class the actor probably in the orchestra 139 
 
 (4) Instances where actors come from the palace . 139 
 If the actor came on the stage he was in his posi- 
 tion soon after being seen . . 1 :;'.) 
 
 The actor in this class was actually seen approach- 
 ing . . . . .14-O 
 
 The time needed fur him to reach his position, if this 
 
 was on the stage . . . 1 1<> 
 
 A longer time consumed if he entered into the or- 
 chestra . . . . .140 
 
 In a few instances actors are present soon after 
 
 being seen . . . . 14O 
 
 In a few instances an unusually long time is con- 
 sumed . . . . .14-1 
 
 In the plays of Shakespeare actors are present soon 
 
 after being seen . . . . 14-1 
 
 A comparison of Shakespeare with the Greek drama- 
 tists shows that in the former the actors had a 
 shorter distance to pass over . . 141 
 
 Titus Andronicus Alcestis . . 141 
 
 Titus Andronicus Hip*polytus . . 141i 
 
 Antony and Cleopatra Helena . 142 
 
 Additional examples from Shakespeare . 14'". 
 
 The inference to be drawn from the comparison 144 
 Actors that entered un-announced . . 144 
 
 The entrance of actors a pleasing feature . 144 
 
 >; 7 Summary of Chapter III. ..... 14-f> 
 
 S The Mistakes of Vitruvius : 
 
 Vitruvius states that the actors stood on a stage . 148 
 
 Some historical facts relating to the theatre . 14S 
 
 The positions of chorus, actors, scenery and T/r / v^ in the 
 
 V. century ... .14*) 
 
 The lowering of orchestra in Roman times . 149 
 
 The above test as applied to certain theatres 140 
 
 The assumption that the orchestra was divided makesckar 
 
 various facts . . . .149 
 
 Vitruvius drew his inferences concerning a Greek stage from 
 
 the Roman stage . .150 
 
 The description of a Roman theatre . . . 15O 
 
 The words of the scholiast in the introduction to thcClouus ISO 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY, 
 BERKELEY 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 Books not returned on time are subject to a fine of 
 50c per volume after the third day overdue, increasing 
 to $1.00 per volume after the sixth day. Books not in 
 demand may be renewed if application ia made before 
 expiration of loan period. 
 
 > 
 
 50m-7,'29 
 
YC 00273